JP2020049376A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing inconveniences in which a player gets bored with a game.SOLUTION: Distribution winning means includes: first flow channel switching means provided with first distribution movable means movable alternately between a first position for distributing a game ball to a first flow channel and a second position for distributing a game ball to a second flow channel; and second flow channel switching means provided with second distribution movable means movable alternately between a third position for distributing the game ball distributed to the second flow channel by the first flow channel switching means to a third flow channel and a fourth position for distributing the game ball to a fourth flow channel for guiding to a ball entrance port. Therefore, a player can play a game while enjoying to which flow channel the game ball entered the distribution winning means is to be distributed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress inconveniences in which the player gets bored with the game. In addition, during a privilege game, the game balls are configured to enter the distribution winning means. As a result, a state after the privilege game can be set advantageous to the player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol that informs the lottery result is displayed on the display device. Has been proposed to be implemented in.

  For example, in Patent Literature 1, the probability that a game ball wins a starting port provided on a game board surface is changed by adjusting a distance between nails provided on the game board surface or the like.

JP 2003-305209 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, since the process until the game ball enters the starting port is monotonous, there has been a problem that if the player plays a game for a long time, the player gets tired of the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine such as the one described above, which can suppress a problem that a player gets tired of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is a game machine based on a ball entrance that is determined to satisfy a condition for judging whether or not a game ball enters, and based on the satisfaction of the condition for judging whether or not the game is performed. And a bonus that enables a variable prize device to award a game ball to a variable prize device that grants a bonus to a player based on the hit / failure determination result of the hit / fail determination unit performing the hit / non-hit determination. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, the game machine having a distribution prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the distribution prize means includes a game ball in the distribution prize means. Alternately into a distributing ball entrance through which a ball can enter, and a first position for distributing a game ball entering the distributing entrance to a first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to a second flow path. First flow path switching means having movable first distribution moving means, and first flow path switching thereof A second position which alternately moves between a third position for distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the step to the third flow path and a fourth position for distributing the game balls to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance opening; A second flow path switching means having a distributing movable means, wherein the variable prize device is set to a position where a game ball can enter the distributing entrance opening when a game ball is entered. The prize-winning device and the sorting prize-winning means are respectively arranged.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the privilege game includes a special privilege game in which the variable prize means has a longer opening time and a variable prize opening time in which the variable prize means has a longer opening time than the special privilege game. And a bonus game type determining unit that determines the type of the bonus game based on the fact that at least a short bonus game is set and the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the variable winning device has a rotating door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In the state where the revolving door is standing, the ball is prevented from entering the variable prize device, and during the execution of the bonus game, the revolving door pivots toward the front of the gaming machine, It is configured to receive a game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the game device and guide the game ball to the inside of the variable winning device and the distribution ball opening.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit being a hit, a bonus game that enables the variable winning device that gives the player a bonus game ball to execute a game ball is executed by the bonus game execution unit.

  In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means.

  The variable prize device and the sorting prize means are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball opening when game balls are entered into the variable prize device.

  This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, during the award game, it is possible to enter the sorting ball entrance, so during the award game, by entering the ball into the sorting prize means, it is possible to enter the ball entry port after the award game. The required number of entering balls can be reduced, and a state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to make many game balls enter not only the variable prize apparatus but also the sorting prize means during the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the privilege game, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is long and a normal privilege game in which the variable prize means has a shorter opening time than the special privilege game are set. Based on the result being a hit, the type of the bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means.

  As a result, when the special privilege game is determined, not only the opening time of the variable prize device is extended but also an opportunity to allow more game balls to enter the distribution prize means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with more benefits for the types of privilege games.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the variable winning device is provided with a rotatable door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In normal times, the upright turning door restricts the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning device. At the time of execution of the bonus game, the game ball received on the upper surface of the turn door is guided to the inside of the variable prize device and the sorting ball opening by turning the turn door to the front side of the gaming machine.

  As a result, more game balls can be made to enter the distribution prize means during the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game even after the bonus game, and to have the effect that the player can play the game for a longer time.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution device in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side in the state where a game ball won in the distribution device in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter in 1st Embodiment, the special design execution area, the normal design holding ball storage area, and the normal design holding ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol per random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the special hit type counter in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo variation table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a background selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the variation aspect of the special symbol displayed on a 3rd symbol display device, (b) is a pseudo symbol in the ceiling variation pattern displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a variation mode when a variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation mode when the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is started during the fluctuation | variation of the pseudo symbol other than the ceiling fluctuation | variation pattern displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying a player that a jackpot with a reduced time displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment has been achieved, and (b) of FIG. ) Is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying a player that a jackpot without a time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment has been achieved, and FIG. It is a figure showing typically the background display mode of precursor A displayed on the 3rd symbol display device, and (d) shows typically the background display mode of precursor B displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (E) is a diagram schematically showing a background display mode of the precursor C displayed on the third symbol display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution apparatus error notification control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution winning processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a distribution discharging process performed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a distribution position initialization process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a distribution position initialization process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a distribution error process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an ending setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pseudo-variation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a background selection process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side in the state where a game ball won in the distribution device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the perspective view which expanded the variable prize apparatus and the distribution prize apparatus in the big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd execution form. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter, the special symbol execution area, the normal symbol holding ball storage area, and the normal symbol holding ball execution area in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol random number table in the second embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a first ordinary symbol per random number table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a second ordinary symbol per random symbol table in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a figure showing typically the special hit type table in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a status selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo variation table in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a background selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a random number setting table in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a variation mode when a special symbol variation is started while the precursor A pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is changing. (B) schematically shows a variation mode when a special symbol is started to change while changing the precursor B pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation mode when the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol is started while changing the precursor C pseudo fluctuation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) illustrates a variation mode in a case where an interrupt normal pseudo variation mode corresponding to a hit of a normal symbol is started while the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is changing. It is the figure which showed typically, (b) is a normal normal corresponding to the hit of a normal symbol when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the pseudo symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment is stop-displayed. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation mode when the pseudo fluctuation mode is started. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution win processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows status determination processing which is one processing of distribution winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st distribution correction processing which is one processing of the normal entrance processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows random setting processing which is one processing of jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution error processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background selection process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a detailed view of the inside of the sorting prime mover 64 provided on the game board 13, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later is changed (for example, the color of the displayed character is changed). .

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emission mode by being turned on or flashing in accordance with a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for guiding balls, a distribution prize winning device 64, A two-start winning device 300, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The distribution prize device 64, the second starting port 300, the first variable prize device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A distribution winning device 64 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 64 when viewed from the front. The sorting prize winning device 64 is formed of a vertically elongated case body, and has a ball entrance 640 through which game balls can enter inside the sorting winning prize device 64 at an upper portion thereof. The entrance 640 includes a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed. Inside the distribution prize device 64, there is provided a first distribution rotation member 64a1 capable of distributing the game ball left and right by rotating. The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is rotatably supported by a case body constituting the distribution winning device 64.

  The case body constituting the sorting prize winning device 64 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate PC or the like) whose inside can be seen through. In the case body, a pattern printed with paint (for example, a pattern of ripples with a short interval or a character such as a numeral) so that the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 provided inside are difficult to visually recognize. Are drawn, and the movement of the game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64 can be visually recognized from the gap in the pattern.

  With such a configuration, the positions and states of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are hard to be recognized by the player, and by visually recognizing the distribution prize device 64 from outside the gaming machine, In addition, it is difficult to determine how many balls will win the first starting port 71.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is formed in a semicircular shape, and the wall portions protrude from the center of the semicircle in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction toward the front side of the gaming machine, and pass through the entrance 640. A first accommodating portion 64c1 and a second accommodating portion 64d1 capable of receiving the game balls. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is a wall portion that is formed vertically upward from the center of the semicircle toward the arc side and protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the semicircular arc directed upward. Assuming that a state in which is raised above the gaming machine is the origin, a state in which the first accommodation portion 64c1 is directed upward (in the direction of the entrance 640) of the gaming machine and a state in which the second accommodation portion 64d1 is oriented upward (into the entrance 640) Direction), and is rotatably supported about 90 degrees to the left and right. Specifically, when the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates rightward and the first storage portion 64c1 rotates to a position facing upward from the gaming machine, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 moves further rightward. Rotation is prohibited by contacting a stopper (not shown) that prohibits rotation in the direction. When the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is rotated to the left from the state where the first storage portion 64c1 is directed upward, the first distribution rotation is performed when the second storage portion 64d1 is positioned upward. When the member 64a1 comes into contact with a stopper (not shown) for preventing further rotation in the left direction, the rotation is prohibited. That is, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 sets the position where the first storage portion 64c1 faces upward as a rightward rotation region, and turns the position where the second storage portion 64d1 faces upward as left rotation. It is configured as an area.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 receives the game ball that has passed through the entrance 640 at the first accommodation portion 64c1 or the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. When a game ball is received in the first accommodating portion 64c1, the weight of the game ball causes the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 3), thereby moving the game ball to the first position. It guides to the first discharge guide path 64z1 that guides to the discharge port 650a1. Here, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right (a rotation angle with the origin where the state in which the magnet 64b1 is directed vertically upward is the origin). A magnet 64b1 is provided at the end of the boundary wall with the second housing portion 64d1.

  The sorting prize winning device 64 includes a second sorting rotating member 64a2, a third sorting rotating member 64a3, a fourth sorting rotating member 64a4, and a fifth sorting, which are configured similarly to the first sorting rotating member 64a1. The rotation member 64a5, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 are respectively attached. A second distribution rotation member 64a2 is attached to the lower right of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second accommodation portion 64d1 receive the game balls rolled on the first guide path 64z2. Have been. At the lower left of the second distribution rotation member 64a2, a third position is provided where the game balls distributed by the first accommodation portion 64c2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 are received by the game balls rolling on the second guide path 64z4. The distribution rotation member 64a3 is attached. A fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is attached to the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second accommodation portion 64d3 receive the game balls rolled on the third guide path 64z6. Have been. A fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is attached to the lower left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 at a position where the game balls distributed by the first accommodation portion 64c4 are received by the game balls rolling on the fourth guide path 64z8. ing. A sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is attached to the lower right of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second accommodation portion 64d5 receive the game balls rolled on the fifth guide path 64z10. Have been. A seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is attached to the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 at a position where the game balls distributed by the first accommodation portion 64c6 are received by the game balls rolling on the sixth guide path 64z12. ing. An eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is attached to the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second storage portion 64d7 receive the game balls rolled on the seventh guide path 64z14. Have been. In addition, the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 are respectively a game ball flowing down the first to seventh guidance paths 64z2 to 64z14 and the magnets 64b1 to 64b1 at positions of the distribution rotation members facing the gaming machine upward. 64b8 is arranged at a position where it collides.

  A first base-side magnet 900a1, a second base-side magnet 900a2, a third base-side magnet 900a3, and a fourth base-side magnet are provided on the back-side base body to which the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are attached. 900a4, a fifth base magnet 900a5, a sixth base magnet 900a6, a seventh base magnet 900a7, and an eighth base magnet 900a8 are arranged respectively. The first to eighth base-side magnets 900a1 to 900a8 face the front-rear direction of the gaming machine at positions where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 face vertically upward and at positions facing each other. Are arranged as follows.

  More specifically, the magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are configured to have polarities repelling each other. Specifically, the first base-side magnet 900a1 is configured by a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the back-side base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. . The first base-side magnet 900a1 is disposed and fixed such that the tip end faces the first distribution rotation member 64a1.

  The magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is also formed of a bar-shaped magnet similarly to the first base-side magnet 900a1, and the first distribution rotation is performed so that the tip end faces the first base-side magnet 900a1. It is fixed to the member 64a1. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates, and the first base-side magnet 900a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are positioned at a position where the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is directly above (on the center line of the entrance 640). This is the position where the magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 comes closest (the leading ends face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 faces directly above. Therefore, it is maintained at a position rotated left or right.

  Accordingly, when the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is located on the center line of the entrance 640 (a vertically upward position), the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is magnetized. And the first base-side magnet 900a1 repel, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates left or right, and either the first storage portion 64c1 or the second storage portion 64d1 is moved to the distribution prize device. The player faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the ball 64. Therefore, the entered game ball comes into contact with the boundary wall between the first accommodation portion 64c1 and the second accommodation portion 64d1, causing the ball to be clogged or causing the game ball to enter the first accommodation of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. It can be prevented from flowing down to the left or right without being accommodated in the portion 64c1 and the second accommodation portion d1.

  Further, when the magnet 64b1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 repel, for example, the first housing portion 64c1 receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and moves the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1. After the guidance, it is possible to prevent the first distribution rotation member 64a1 from turning right (the first housing portion 64c1 faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1, the second accommodation portion 64d1 is in a state of facing upward, and the game ball that has entered the first distribution winning device 64a1 next is the second ball. When the receiving portion 64d1 receives the game ball, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates about 180 degrees clockwise from the state by the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first guide path 64z2. As described above, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution prize winning device 64 to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2, and to win the prize.

  The second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 also have the same mechanism as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. The first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are normally configured to rotate by the weight of the game ball, but the main control is performed by operating the RAM erase switch 122, as described later. In the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110, in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015), the distribution position adjustment motor 263 of the distribution prize device 64 moves to the predetermined initial position. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 are respectively turned to predetermined initial positions (in this embodiment, positions for guiding game balls to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15). Moved and set. Here, the initial position is a position when the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e described later is 0 (a state in which 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution prize winning device 64). "1" indicating that the first accommodation portion 64c1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is facing upward, and is a position where the second accommodation portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 is facing upward. "0", indicating that the first storage portion 64c3 of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is facing upward, and "1" indicating that the second storage portion 64d4 of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is "0" indicating that the position is directed upward, "1" indicating that the first storage portion 64c5 of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is directed upward, and the sixth distribution rotation member. 64a6 at a position where the second storage portion 64d6 faces upward. "0", indicating that the first storage portion 64c7 of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is facing upward, and "1", indicating that the first storage portion 64d8 of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is facing upward. Is set to the initial position by setting "10101010" as continuous data of "0" indicating that it is a position facing upward.

  In addition, when the first distribution rotation member 64a1 distributes the game ball to the first guidance path 64z2, the second distribution rotation member 64a2 stores the game ball flowing down the first guidance path 64z2 in the first accommodation portion 64c2 or It is received by the second accommodation section 64d2 and guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 or the second guide path 64z4. As described above, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 continuously guide the game ball from the first guidance path 64z2 to the seventh guidance path 64z14, thereby forming the eighth distribution rotation. The game ball reaches the member 64a8. When a game ball is received by the first accommodation portion 64c8 of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 and is distributed to the eighth guide path 64z16, the game ball flowing down the eighth guide path 64z16 is guided to the first starting port 71. And enters the ball.

  In a state where the gaming machine is initialized, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 guide the game ball from the first discharge guide path 64z1 to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15, respectively. Is located in the position.

  Specifically, the first, third, fifth, and seventh distribution rotating members 64a1, 64a3, 64a5, and 64a7 are located at positions where the first housing portions 64c1, 64c3, 64c5, and 64c7 face upwards from the gaming machine (right side). (The position rotated by the maximum angle in the direction). On the other hand, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth distribution rotation members 64a2, 64a4, 64a6, and 64a8 are located at positions where the second housing portions 64d2, 64d4, 64d6, and 64d8 face the gaming machine (maximum in the left direction). (A position rotated by an angle).

  Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance 640 from the initial state, the game ball that has entered the first ball enters the first accommodation portion 64c1, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates leftward. Then, it is guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1. Thereby, the game balls are discharged to the sorting prize winning device 64 to the outside. At this time, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is stopped at a position where the second storage portion 64d1 faces upward. Next, the second game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and the first distribution rotation member 64a2 rotates rightward. The game balls are distributed to the first taxiway 64z2. The game ball that has flowed down the first guide path 64z2 enters the second accommodation portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2, and the second distribution rotation member 64a2 rotates rightward, and the second discharge guidance path 64z3. The game ball is distributed to.

  Next, the third game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the first accommodation portion 64c1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and is distributed to the first discharge guide path 64z1. The game ball that has entered the fourth ball enters the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, is guided to the first guide path 64z2, and enters the first accommodation portion 64c2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2. A game ball enters and is distributed to the second taxiway 64z4. In this way, it is necessary for four game balls to enter the entrance 640 before the second distribution rotation member 64a2 distributes the game balls to the second guide path 64z4. Similarly, until the third distribution rotation member 64a3 guides the game ball to the third guide path 64z6, it is necessary that eight game balls enter the ball entrance 640. Similarly, the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 has 16 balls, the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 has 32 balls, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 has 64 balls, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 has 128 balls, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a7. In the minute rotation member 64a8, 256 balls are required for distributing game balls from the fourth guideway 64z8 to the eighth guideway 64z16.

  That is, from the initial state of the sorting prize device 64 (zero game balls entered) until the game ball enters the first starting port 71, 256 game balls enter the sorting prize device 64. You need to ball. As will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 71, it is determined to be a jackpot (all jackpot random numbers are determined to be jackpots). Has a configuration in which a big hit always occurs. With this configuration, the player can play a game for the purpose of causing more game balls to enter the distribution prize device 64, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. Can be.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670a1 for detecting a stop position, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 guides the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1 (the first distribution rotation member 64a1). The main control device 110 determines whether the first accommodation section 64c1 is facing upward (upward) or the state where game balls are guided to the first guide path 64z2 (the second accommodation section 64d1 is facing upward). Of the MPU 201 can be detected. Similarly, a rotation angle sensor 670a2 is provided for the second distribution rotation member 64a2, a rotation angle sensor 670a3 is provided for the third distribution rotation member 64a3, and a rotation angle sensor 670a4 is provided for the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4. A rotation angle sensor 670a5 is provided for the distribution rotation member 64a5, a rotation angle sensor 670a6 is provided for the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, a rotation angle sensor 670a7 is provided for the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is provided. Are provided with rotation angle sensors 670a8, respectively.

  The rotation angle sensors 670a1 to 670a8 constitute the distribution position confirmation sensor 262, and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 make the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 pachinko machines with respect to the main controller 110. In a state where the machine 10 is turned to a position facing upward (a position turned rightward), “1” indicating a positive rotation angle is output, and the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 are turned upward. In a state where the camera has been turned to the facing position (the position turned to the left), “0” indicating a negative rotation angle is output.

  The game ball guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1 passes through the first discharge port 650a1, is discharged to the outside of the sorting and winning device 64, and flows down the front of the game board 13 again. The first discharge port 650a1 is configured by a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed, and is configured to be detectable by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the same configuration, the game ball guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 is from the second discharge port 650a2, and the game ball guided to the third discharge guide path 64z5 is from the third discharge port 650a3, and the fourth discharge guide path. The game ball guided to 64z7 is the fourth discharge port 650a4, the game ball guided to the fifth discharge guide path 64z9 is the fifth discharge port 650a5, and the game ball guided to the sixth discharge guide path 64z11 is the sixth ball. Game balls guided to the seventh discharge guide path 64z13 from the discharge port 650a6 are discharged from the seventh discharge guide path 650a7, and game balls guided to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15 are discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  Since the game balls that have passed through the entrance 640 and the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are respectively detected by the sensors, the game balls that have entered the sorting winning device 64 The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can grasp the number and the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 64 at present. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can recognize the number of game balls entering the distribution prize device 64 required until the next big hit. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, whether the number of game balls hitting in the sorting prize device 64 is equal to the number winning in the first starting port 71 (this execution) By determining (256 in the embodiment), it is possible to determine whether the game ball has been illegally won in the first starting port 71.

  Further, by grasping the number of game balls currently entering the distribution prize device 64, it is possible to recognize whether there is any game ball illegally entered. Specifically, for example, when a hole is opened from the outside of the sorting prize winning device 64 and game balls are made to enter from other than the passage opening 640, the number of discharges is larger than the number of passages. Thereby, fraud can be recognized.

  Furthermore, even in the case where a problem that the game balls are clogged in the sorting prize winning device 64 occurs, the difference between the number of the game balls passing through the entrance 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 is reduced. When a certain number (ten in the present embodiment) is notified, a ball jam can be detected early, and the game store can eliminate the ball jam.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a second distribution rotation member 64a2 is provided at the lower right of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and a third distribution rotation member 64a3 is provided at the lower left of the second distribution rotation member 64a2. To the lower right of the third distribution rotating member 64a3, the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5 to the lower left of the fourth distribution rotating member 64a4, and the right to the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5. The sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is disposed below, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is disposed at the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is disposed at the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7. By doing so, the use of the space in the left and right directions can be suppressed and the distribution prize winning device 64 can be compactly configured, as compared with the case where the distribution rotation members are arranged in the left direction or the right direction.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are arranged alternately (zigzag position) as shown in FIG. 3, but are arranged side by side in one direction to the left or right. By doing so, the initial position can be set by moving all the distribution rotation members in one direction when setting the initial position, so that the initial position setting process can be easily performed.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and ten or more distribution rotation members may be arranged. You may comprise so that less than eight may be arrange | positioned. As described above, by changing the number of distribution rotating members, the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 can be changed, and the probability of obtaining a big hit can be adjusted. it can.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of distribution rotation members can be adjusted at a game store side. Specifically, the distribution rotation member and the starting port are each configured to be detachable, and the game store side performs the game by adjusting according to the convenience of the game store by attaching and setting according to convenience. be able to. In addition, since it can be changed depending on the day, it can be adjusted by changing the sales so that the balance between the game store and the player becomes appropriate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the first starting port 71, a random number value is set so that all are determined to be hits. Good.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. 4 indicates the flowing direction of the game ball guided to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16, and OUT indicates the game guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15. The downward direction of the sphere is shown.

  Although omitted in FIG. 3, as shown in FIG. 4, first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 face the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 of the sorting and winning device 64. Each is provided. The first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 are formed by walls protruding toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Have been. Further, even when the game balls flowing down the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 are strong, the game balls are guided by the first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8, so that the game balls are moved to the first to eighth positions. The disadvantage of being discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 without being guided by the distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. On the right side of the center of the game board 13, a normal symbol starting port 67 is provided. The normal symbol starting port 67 is a gate-type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. Are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), and then a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○” or “X”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. As will be described later, in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0% (the random number value determined to be a hit is not set). On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the winning probability is set to 100% (all random numbers are determined to be hits).

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (non-working time), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0%. (For example, 1/1000). Here, in the normal gaming state, the game ball is fired on the right side of the game area, that is, the right side (a game method in which the game ball is made to win in the normal symbol start-up opening 67 in order to win the normal symbol). It is only necessary to set a probability that the operation will be advantageous to the player.

  When it is determined that a normal symbol has been won, a symbol “○” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory is operated, and the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, which are normally maintained in an upright state, are raised from the state in which the blades 300a, 300b stand substantially vertically. The game balls move in a V-shape (reverse C-shape), and the game balls are guided by the blades 300a and 300b, so that the game balls enter a state where they can easily enter the ball for a predetermined time (3s in the present embodiment). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been removed, a symbol “x” indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol has been removed is lit on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, is provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, among the balls won in the ordinary symbol starting port 67 by lighting up. The number of rounds during the big hit and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The seven-segment display 37b includes two right and left seven-segment LEDs. On the left and right 7-segment LEDs, a special symbol indicating a determination result of a lottery game based on winning of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is dynamically displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (in the present embodiment, the center of the seven segments). Is blinked), and then stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out of order, a symbol “−−” indicating the out of which one central segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the determination is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation, such as the symbols “33” and “77”, is displayed. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, it is always determined to be a jackpot (all the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol are determined to be a jackpot). Therefore, the change of the special symbol is started and the stopped symbol is a symbol indicating a big hit.

  The variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but a variation time is set in the variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not (big hit lottery) and the jackpot type is also determined. Do. The jackpot types determined here are, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot A (100 time reduction periods for a 16R jackpot ordinary symbol, ie, a jackpot with a time saving of 100), a jackpot B (0 time reduction periods for a 16R jackpot ordinary symbol 0 times, That is, a time-saving big hit) is prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "77" is displayed for the jackpot A and "33" is displayed for the jackpot B, for example).

  Here, the "big hit A" is a big hit with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, and after the big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state described later. In this time-saving gaming state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, the probability of being determined as a hit is from 0% (no random value determined to be a hit) to 100% (all random numbers are determined to be a hit). To be determined). The time-saving game state is continuously executed until the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches 100, and when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches 100, the game is shifted to the normal game state. Here, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a hit is set to 0% when a game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a special symbol (third symbol) is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a prize (start prize) in the first orifice 71 or the second orifice 300. ) Is provided with a third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are special symbols. Is displayed as one of In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol similar to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a pseudo symbol. As for the pseudo symbol, as will be described later, a symbol similar to the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol in a predetermined fluctuating pattern based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64. Done. In the case of the special symbol variable display, the special symbol variable display is also started in the first symbol display device 37, but for the pseudo symbol, the pseudo symbol variable display is performed only by the third symbol display device 81. .

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, when a game ball has won the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, it is determined that all are hits. A variation pattern that is a big hit is set for each of the case and the second starting port 300.

  FIG. 11A shows a variation pattern of a special symbol selected based on the fact that a game ball has won the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure showing a certain normal special fluctuation pattern. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 in a case where the pseudo symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the left, middle, and right symbols (in the present embodiment, numerals 1 to 9) form a loop (1 → 2 →).・ ・ →→ 9 → 1) High-speed variable display is started in ascending order. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is established, and only the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed. In the reach state, the sound “reach” is output from the sound output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the character "Achievement of heaven!" Is displayed below the area of the third symbol display device 81 where the special symbol is displayed, and the player receives 256 balls. Has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, and a notification indicating that the gaming ball has won a prize is displayed in the first starting port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has hit a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, if the gaming ball wins in the first starting port 71, the gaming machine always wins a jackpot. Therefore, the player recognizes that the winning in the first starting port 71 results in a big hit. . Therefore, the player determines that the number of balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are to be won in the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 is directly connected to the jackpot. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 in the sorting prize winning device 64 has entered the sorting prize winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the character “Arrival at heaven!”. Can be recognized as a jackpot.

  FIG. 11B shows a variation in the ceiling variation pattern selected when the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 is 256 among the variation patterns of the pseudo symbol shown in FIG. It is a figure showing a ceiling special fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol selected when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started when displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the ceiling variation pattern of the pseudo symbol, left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (in the present embodiment, numerals 1 to 9) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order. Not shown). Next, the left and right pseudo symbols have the same number (in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped at "7"), and the "reach" voice is output from the voice output device 226. Is done. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, and the symbol of the closed door is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 11B, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is displayed. The symbol is replaced as it is as a special symbol, and a diagram in which the closed door is opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11B, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message “Arrived in heaven!” Is displayed below the special symbol. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred.

  Note that this ceiling change pattern is the same time as the time required for a game ball to enter the first starting port 71 after entering the entrance port 640 of the sorting prize device 64 (time set at the time of design). The variable time is set in. Therefore, after the display of the fluctuation of the ceiling fluctuation pattern is started and the fluctuation time ends, the game ball will be awarded to the first starting port 71, so that the replacement with the special symbol is smoothly performed, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the change is a pseudo symbol change or a special symbol change, and the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol based on the ball entry into the entrance 640 that does not win the first starting port 71. Even with the display, it is possible to expect a big hit (winning to the first starting port 71).

  Further, when switching from the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern to the ceiling special variation pattern of the special symbol, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed, and then the variation display of the ceiling special symbol is changed. It may be configured to start.

  FIG. 12 shows a third symbol display device 81, in which a pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern, and a special symbol selected when a game ball is won in the first starting port 71. It is a figure showing a display mode of a change special change pattern which is a change pattern.

  As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 12, when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, as shown in the diagram in FIG. When the special symbol variation display is started in the special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol that has been variation displayed disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. After that, the same special symbol on the left and right is displayed in the “reach state” in which the display is stopped, and the character “Arrival at heaven!” Is displayed. After that, the game is stopped and displayed with a special symbol of “777” to notify the player that the big hit has occurred.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling variation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a case of a jackpot, and even if the player does not have the ceiling variation pattern, the player has an expectation for the jackpot. Can be made. In addition, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give freshness and to pay attention to the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, a first starting port switch or a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first start port switch and the second start port switch are turned on, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 are also one of the winning ports in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins.

  On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally long rectangular variable winning device 65 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery relating to the jackpot of the lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined jackpot type, and both the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a privilege game state that is advantageous to the player. Is performed.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 stops the first special symbol with a symbol showing a hit based on winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, and based on the big hit type. The opening / closing operation is set, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win any of the winning ports 63, 65a, 71, and 300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIGS. 5 and 5). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. Various data and control programs for executing these processes are stored in the ROM 202, and a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes is stored in the RAM 203. Is provided.

  Here, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a random number table 202a per special symbol, a special type table 202b, a random number table per normal symbol 202c, a fluctuation pattern table for big hits 202d, a fluctuation pattern table (normal pattern) 202e, a normal pattern At least the stop type command 202f, the average arrival second data 202g, the distribution initial position data 202h, the distribution role object position data 202i, and the ceiling arrival number data 202j are set (stored).

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol random number table 202a stores the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. 5 is a data table storing random numbers determined to be. In the present embodiment, all the values (0 to 109) of the random number counter C1 per special symbol are stored in the random number per special symbol table 202a as random numbers determined to be hits. In the present embodiment, the setting is made such that all random numbers are determined to be hits. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and random numbers determined to be hits may be appropriately set.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the special hit type table 202b is a table for determining the type of the big hit to be executed when the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the lottery game. In the present embodiment, after the 16R jackpot has been executed, a jackpot A in which a time saving game state is set, and after the 16R jackpot has been executed, a jackpot B in which a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set is set. ing. If the value of the special hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is "0 to 79", the big hit A is set ( Determined), and if it is "80 to 99", the special hit type table 202b is set so that the big hit B is set (determined).

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the random number per ordinary symbol table 202c stores random numbers in the ordinary random number per symbol table 202c determined to be a win in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state) and the time saving gaming state. This is the data table that was created. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a random number value determined to be a hit is not set. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined that all of the values of the random number counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting port 67 are out of range. In the time-saving game state, all random numbers are set as random numbers in the normal symbol per symbol random number table 202c. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, all the values of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (0 to 99) acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting port 67 are determined to be winning.

  The big hit change pattern table 202d stores a change display mode (dynamic display mode) that is a special symbol hit. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 71 and the second starting opening 300, all of the winnings are won and there is no case of a loss. ing. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, dedicated jackpot variation patterns are respectively set for winning of the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300.

  The jackpot variation pattern for the winning at the first starting port 71 is selected when the pseudo symbol is fluctuating and stopped, or when the pseudo symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern. The switching special fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in the special ceiling fluctuation pattern and the pseudo fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern is set.

  As the big hit variation pattern for the winning in the second starting port 300, a special time-saving variation pattern is set. The time-saving special fluctuation pattern is constituted by a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds, and is displayed in a state where predetermined symbols (for example, “777” or the like) are aligned with a double-eye pattern to notify that a big hit has occurred. Has become. With this configuration, the game time in the time-saving game state can be shortened, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early because the big hit occurs at short intervals. In addition, the game store can shorten the time during which the game balls are not consumed during the time-saving game, thereby increasing the sales.

  The variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e is a variation pattern table in which the variation display mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is stored. When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. Are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), and then a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”or“ X ”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). . When a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, two types of variation patterns of normal symbols are set in a variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e, a hit variation pattern and a deviation variation pattern. The hit fluctuation pattern and the off fluctuation pattern are both set with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. As described above, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is constituted by the short fluctuation time, the time-saving gaming state can be further shortened. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games by efficiently using the game time. Also, the game store can increase more sales.

  In the stop type command 202f for the normal symbol, a command corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol and the stop type of the normal symbol is stored.

  The reaching average seconds data 202g is the average seconds data calculated at the time of designing the time required from when a game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 to when it enters the first starting port 71. It is remembered. In the present embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is stored as “5 seconds to 7 seconds”.

  Further, in this embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is configured to be set in advance based on the design value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball may be entered from the ball port 640, and the average arrival time may be set based on the time required to enter the ball, or the first starting port 71 may be won each time. It may be configured such that the number of seconds to reach is measured and the average number of seconds is updated every time. With this configuration, even when the arrival seconds are different for each of the gaming machines due to the difference in the accuracy of the members constituting the distribution prize winning device 64, the accurate arrival seconds can be set. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately identify whether or not fraud has occurred.

  Also, as described above, when the average arrival time is measured and set for each pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the pseudo ceiling fluctuation pattern is determined based on the measured and set average arrival time. Etc. may be set. With this configuration, the switching from the pseudo symbol to the special symbol can be performed more smoothly and naturally, so that it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 flow down the upper surface of the game board 13 and are discharged from the out ports 66. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and a common guide path through which the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 flow may be provided to guide the game balls to the general winning opening. When a game ball enters the general winning opening, for example, a prize ball such as three balls may be paid out to the player. With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 can perform an effect of determining whether a game ball entering the entrance 640 enters the general winning opening or the first starting opening 71. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, by making a prize ball payout in the general winning opening and paying out the prize ball, the base of the pachinko machine 10 (difference between the launched game ball and the paid game ball) until the first starting port 71 is won is played. Can be adjusted so as not to be too disadvantageous to the player (the investment amount of the player becomes too large).

  The distribution initial position data 202h stores the initial positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Here, the initial position stores the position at which the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game ball to the first to eighth discharge guiding paths 64z1 to 64z15, respectively. The distribution initial position data 202h is used in the distribution position initialization processing (FIG. 25, S1015) executed in the start-up processing (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on. Used when initializing.

  The distribution role object position data 202i corresponds to the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize device 64 (the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e), and the first to eighth distributions. The positions of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 (the positions where the first storage portions 64c1 to 64c8 face upward or the positions where the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 face upward) are stored.

  Specifically, when the value of the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e is 0 (a state in which 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution prize winning device 64), the first distribution rotating member 64a1 has a second "1" indicating that the first housing portion 64c1 is located upward, "0" indicating that the second housing portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotating member 64a2 is facing upward, "1" indicating that the first accommodation portion 64c3 of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is facing upward, and is a position where the second accommodation portion 64d4 of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is facing upward. "0", indicating that the first accommodation portion 64c5 of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is at a position facing upward, and "2" indicating that the second accommodation portion 64d6 of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is facing upward. “0” indicating the position facing upward, the seventh "1" indicating that the first housing portion 64c7 of the rotating member 64a7 is facing upward, indicating that the first housing portion 64d8 of the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 is facing upward. “10101010” is set as data in which “0” is continuous. It should be noted that “10101010” is set in the above-described distribution initial position data 202h.

  If the value of the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e is 1 (a state in which one game ball has entered the distribution prize winning device 64), the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is directed upward. Since it moves to the position, “00101010”, which has been changed to “0” indicating that the second storage portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is facing upward, is set.

  As described above, the sorting role object position data 202i is obtained by converting the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at the time when the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64. And stored as data tables. This sorting role object position data 202i indicates that the value of the sorting winning prize ball number counter 203e is “0 to 255” (0 to 255 balls have been thrown into the sorting prize winning device 64 (the state where 256 balls have been thrown is 0). ) Are set corresponding to each value.

  The detection of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is detected based on the output value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262. The distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The positions at which the magnets 64b1 to b8 face vertically upward in the gaming machine are set to 0 degrees, and are set so as to have a positive value when rotated to the right and to a negative value when rotated to the left. . Therefore, when the value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is a positive value, it is determined that the first storage units 64c1 to 64c8 are facing upward (the data of the distribution role object position data 202i is “1”). Is determined). On the other hand, if the value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is a negative value, it is determined that the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 are facing upward (the data of the distribution role object position data 202i is “0”). Is determined).

  The ceiling arrival number data 202j stores the value of the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e from when the distribution prize device 64 is in the initial state until a game ball wins in the first starting port 71. That is, the number of balls entered into the distribution prize device 64 required for the game balls to win in the first starting port 71 is stored. The ceiling arrival number data 202j is provided for recognizing the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e required until the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 wins the first starting port 71. In the present embodiment, when 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64, the 256th game ball wins the first starting port 71, that is, the state in which the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 255. In this case, the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e is 0 (excluding 0 set by initialization) in the ceiling arrival number data 202j. Is set. That is, the value obtained by adding 1 to 255 from the sorting prize ball count counter 203e and updating it to 0 corresponds to the ceiling arrival number data 202j.

  In this embodiment, the ceiling arrival number 202j is set in advance. However, when the sorting prize ball counter 203e is updated to 0 by adding 1 from 255, the 256th sorting ball is sorted. A configuration may be such that a ceiling arrival flag indicating that the ball has been hit is set in the prize winning device 64, and the flag is turned on.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are set. , An initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. The random number per normal symbol C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number per symbol counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27). The updated value is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol execution area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning to the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. When the special symbol is changing, only the prize balls (three game balls in the present embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring the respective counter values and the like.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the winning ball of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is configured such that the setting as the holding ball is not provided when a prize is made during the change of the special symbol, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls may be set regardless of whether or not there is an upper limit number.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The random number counter C1 per special symbol is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 109) in order. It returns to the structure. In particular, when the special symbol random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special symbol random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special symbol random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 109, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27).

  The value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting opening 71 or the second starting opening 300 (starting winning). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203c1 corresponding to the winning opening in the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the special symbol per random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special symbol per random number counter C1 is set to If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot set in the random number table 202a (“0 to 109” in the present embodiment), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot.

  The special symbol random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. In the special symbol per random number counter C1, the number of the random numbers (winning value) to be a big hit is 110 and "0 to 109" is stored in the random number per special symbol table 202a. That is, the values of all the special symbol per random number counters C1 are determined to be big hits.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type when a big hit occurs. The special hit type counter C2 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). , The value returns to 0 after reaching. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 (start win). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a of the RAM 203.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the special hit type table 202b (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 16 and the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. There is a "big hit B" in which a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set after the game.

  In the special hit type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 9, the value "0-79" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the big hit A, and the value "80-99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the big hit B. ing.

  When the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (in the present embodiment, all values are set to the value that makes a big hit), the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is stored. The big hit type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is determined from the special hit type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the big hit A is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80”, the big hit B is determined as the big hit type. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special jackpot type table 202b is defined so that the jackpot A is selected with a probability of about 80% in the case of a jackpot, and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 20%. I have.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. Ordinarily, the random number counter C4 per symbol is configured as a loop counter which is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67. Then, the value of the random number which is the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the ordinary symbol per random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number that is a win set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol.

  Further, when the normal symbol per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal random number counter per symbol C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number counter C4 per symbol is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (through gate). You. The number of random numbers determined to be a hit is 0 in the normal gaming state, that is, in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), the normal symbol does not win. In the time saving game state, the number is 100, and the range is "0 to 99". That is, since it is determined that all random numbers are hits, the game ball is usually set to the symbol starting port 67. If you pass, it is a configuration that always wins. When it is determined that a hit has occurred, a symbol “O” is illuminated and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83, and the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are reduced to a time-saving game. In the state, the operation of opening for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment) is performed once (in the normal game state, the symbol is usually not set because no hit is set). The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter per symbol C4 (value = 0 to 99), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200 in FIG. 27).

  When the game ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port 67, when the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed and each counter value based on the retained ball is not stored in the ordinary symbol retained ball storage area 203b, It is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area provided in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b. In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment). Is stored in the ordinary random number counter storage area 203b of the number of suspensions (normal symbol suspensions 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the ordinary symbol random number counter C4. When a random value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is set to ON, and based on the random value, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped or the normal symbol is stopped. Is set to off when the data is shifted to the immediately preceding holding area as a result of digestion. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to ON. The determination as to whether or not data is stored in the reserved area or whether or not the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner is executed based on which reserved area or the ordinary symbol of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 24). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a special symbol execution area 203a, an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b, an ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a time reduction counter 203d, a sorting winning ball number counter 203e, a sorting discharging ball number counter 203f, and a sorting winning timer. 203g, a distribution winning flag 203h, and at least a memory area 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol are stored, and when the special symbol is stopped for the variable display, the first start port 71 or the second starting port 71a. This is a storage area in which various acquired counter values are stored when a game ball wins at the starting port 300. Each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is cleared (erased) to 0 when the special symbol stops changing.

  More specifically, the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a stores the respective values of the special symbol random number counter C1 and the special symbol type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in accordance with the detection of the start winning. You. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 71 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 reads the values of the special symbol random number counter C1 and the special symbol counter C2 from the counter buffer. Is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a. When the MPU 201 detects the timing of starting the execution of the fluctuation effect (data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a while the special symbol is stopped), the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol is detected. Processing such as display setting of the display device 81 is executed.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 obtained from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the special symbol execution area 203a, the MPU 201 converts the data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a into a special symbol described later. Referring to the fluctuation start process (S204 in FIG. 16), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a fluctuation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing a random number counter C4 for each ordinary symbol acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in accordance with detection of a winning start to the ordinary symbol opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed (start winning) to the normal symbol starting port 67 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 outputs the normal symbol random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. Is obtained and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The ordinary symbol flag provided in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4 and the normal symbol flag) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. . In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls are sequentially arranged in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting opening 67 (start winning) from the holding areas where the data is free, in order from the earliest digested holding area ( (Reserved areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls) are stored.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (value of the normal winning random number counter C4) corresponding to each winning start stored in the ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to one starting winning is provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Normally shifts to the symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c allows a game ball to pass through a normal symbol starting port 67 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as a "start winning"). ), The number of pending balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) is up to four times each. It is a counter for counting. The ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a counter that stores the total number of retained balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the ordinary symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process (S1014 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed (see S805 in FIG. 21).

  The time saving counter 203d is a counter area in which the number of time savings 100 is set after the big hit game of big hit A is executed. When the number of time savings is set, the normal symbol per symbol for time saving gaming state is set in the random number per symbol table 202c until the number of time savings is set to zero. In addition, when a symbol "O" indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the operation of opening the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory in the opening time (1s in the present embodiment). Is executed once.

  The time reduction counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the time reduction counter 203d becomes 0, the time shift game state is shifted to the normal game state, and the normal symbol random number counter 202c is shifted to the normal game state. A random number table per normal symbol for a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set.

  The distribution prize ball number counter 203e is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a game ball has won the entrance 640 of the distribution prize device 64. In a state where the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0, and in a distribution winning award process (FIG. 18, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, a game ball has passed through the entrance 640. Is incremented by one. It is initialized to 0 when the big hit game is started.

  The number-of-distributed-discharge-balls counter 203f is a counter that is incremented by one each time a game ball passes through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution prize device 64. In a state where the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0. In the distribution discharge processing (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the game balls are set to the first to eighth discharge ports. When it is determined that the signal has passed any one of 650a1 to 650a8, 1 is added. In addition, based on the start of the big hit game, the sorting and discharging ball number counter 203f is initialized.

  In the present embodiment, the sorting and discharging ball number counter 203f counts the number of game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharging ports 650a1 to 650a8. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. , A 1 may be added, and when a game ball is discharged from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8, the count value may be decremented by 1. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls that are winning in the distribution winning device 64.

  When a game ball passes through the entrance 640 of the distribution prize winning device 64, the distribution prize timer 203g adds the value of the distribution prize ball counter 203e to a set counter value (in this embodiment, 1 is added from 255). If the updated value is 0), it is a timer for measuring the flowing time of the game ball. That is, the fact that the value of the distribution winning counter 203e is 0, which is updated by adding 1 from 255, means that the 256th game ball has entered, and therefore, after entering the entrance 640, The time until the ball enters the first starting port 71 is measured.

  When the game ball passes through the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64, the value of the sorting prize timer 203g is set to 0, and the start of the measurement is set. In the distribution error process (S1207 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, if the distribution prize flag 203h is set to ON, 1 is added. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution prize timer 203g is set to zero.

  The distribution prize flag 203h is a flag indicating that the 256th game ball (the distribution prize ball number counter 203e) has entered the distribution prize device 64. Specifically, the distribution prize flag 203g is set when the game ball passes through the entrance 640 in the distribution prize processing (S105 in FIG. 18) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the value of the number counter 203e is the set counter value (0 updated by adding 1 from 255 in the present embodiment), that is, the 256th game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64. If set to on. In the start winning process (S107 in FIG. 20, which is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110), when the game ball enters the first starting port 71, if the distribution winning flag 203h is on, the flag is set to off. Is done. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution prize flag 203h is set to off.

  The other memory area 203i is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, when it is determined that the 256th game ball, which is the number of game balls prize in the first starting port 71, has entered the ball entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64, the game ball is placed in the first position. Since it is configured to measure the flow-down time until a prize enters the first starting port 71, if a game ball prizes in the first starting port 71 in a time longer or shorter than a time assumed in advance by design, an injustice is detected. Judgment can be suppressed by determining that there is a possibility that the operation has been performed and notifying an error or the like.

  If it is determined that the number of game balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) that will win the first start-up port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 has entered, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. , It is possible to determine in advance that the first starting port 71 is to be won, and to execute the control. When a winning is made to the first starting port 71, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By determining whether or not the first winning opening flag 203h is off, if a winning occurs in the first starting opening 71, an error or the like is notified to notify the first starting opening 71 by fraud. Winning can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing drive of the specific winning opening 65a are opened / closed forward with the lower side as an axis. MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erase signals SG2 output from a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  In the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, at least a pseudo fluctuation table 222a and a background selection table 222b are set. Although not shown, a control program executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, fixed value data, and the like are also stored in the ROM 222.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the pseudo fluctuation table 222a includes a fluctuation pattern for displaying a pseudo symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner in accordance with the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d and the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a. Are stored in association with the values of. As the types of the fluctuation patterns, a normal deviation fluctuation pattern, a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach A fluctuation pattern, a super reach B fluctuation pattern, a precursor fluctuation pattern, and a ceiling fluctuation pattern are set.

  In the normal deviation fluctuation pattern, three numbers 1 to 9 as one of the pseudo symbols are arranged on the third symbol display device 81 in a line on the left, center, and right, and are displayed in ascending order for a predetermined time (for example, 2 During the second display, the display is changed at a high speed and then stopped and displayed with different numbers (for example, “456”) in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation until all the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed is 3 seconds.

  In the normal reach variation pattern, three numbers 1-9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side on the left, middle, and right, and during a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), After the pseudo symbols are variably displayed in ascending order at a high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped oscillating with the same number (for example, “7”), and then a voice “reach” is output from the voice output device 226 to reach the reach state. After that, the medium symbols are displayed in a low-speed, fluctuating order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed in a different pattern from the left and right patterns (for example, “757”). The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is 10 seconds.

  In the super reach A fluctuation pattern, three numerical symbols of 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in the left, middle, and right, and are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In the meantime, after the pseudo symbols are variably displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the voice output device 226, After the reach state is reached, a character different from the numerical pseudo symbol (for example, a girl in a swimsuit with a polka dot pattern) is displayed. The numeric symbol pattern of the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed along with the character, and the girl performs an operation of stopping the numeric symbol, and stops at a numeric symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, “757”). The change time from the start of the variable display of the numeric symbols to the stop display of all the numeric symbols is 15 seconds.

  The super reach B fluctuation pattern is different from the super reach A fluctuation pattern in a girl's swimsuit as a displayed character. Specifically, a girl wearing a red swimsuit is displayed. In other respects, the same fluctuation display as in Super Reach A is performed.

  In the precursor reach variation pattern, three numerical symbols of 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side on the left, middle, and right sides for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols are variably displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing at the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226, and the reach is output. After the state is reached, the text "Slightly closer to heaven!" Is displayed. The middle symbol is displayed at a low speed and displayed in ascending order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed in a different pattern from the left and right patterns (for example, “757”). The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is constituted by 20 seconds. In this way, by displaying the characters “a little more to the heavens!”, The player can determine that the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 will result in the first starting port 71 being awarded. Can be recognized as approaching.

  Since this precursor fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected only when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d is “201 to 254”, the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d is It is also a fluctuation pattern that notifies (value range).

  In the ceiling variation pattern, three numbers 1-9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in a horizontal line on the left, the center, and the right for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). During the period, after the pseudo symbols are displayed in the ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing at the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the voice output device 226. After reaching the reach state, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11B, the three numeral symbols are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, and the picture of the closed door is displayed. . The time until the picture of the closed door is displayed is constituted by a fluctuation time of 6 seconds, and the middle symbol is displayed in a state of fluctuation and display at high speed.

  The ceiling change pattern is a change pattern selected when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is 255, and is selected when a game ball is to win the first starting port 71. That is, the ceiling variation pattern is configured in a variation mode that is linked to the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, in order to link with the fluctuation of the special symbol, the average time required from when the game ball passes through the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 to when the first ball 71 is awarded is 5 seconds to 7 seconds. It has a variation time of 6 seconds which is within the range of seconds. Thereby, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, it is possible to smoothly switch to the special symbol change display, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Further, by setting the time to an intermediate time of the average time, switching can be performed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d increases, it is difficult to select the normal deviation fluctuation pattern (the number of values assigned to the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is small). I have. Also, if the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is large (for example, “201 to 254”), the super reach A fluctuation pattern is easily selected (the number of values assigned to the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is large). ) Is configured. As a result, when the frequency of displaying the super reach A fluctuation pattern increases, the number of gaming balls that have won the sorting prize winning device 64 may be close to the number that will win the first starting port 71. Can be expected. Also, when the game is started, it is not known what the state of the distribution winning device 64 is (the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8), There is an interest in how much the game ball must be made to enter the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 before winning. Here, the type of the variation pattern that is variably displayed in the pseudo symbol is changed in the selection rate in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize apparatus 64 (the value of the subordinate distribution prize ball number counter 223d). Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the current number of balls entering the distribution prize device 64. Therefore, the player can be interested even in the variation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected regardless of the jackpot determination, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the background selection table 222b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in association with the value of the follow-up winning prize ball number counter 223d and the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a. A plurality of background images are respectively set. As the type of the background image, a normal background, a precursor A background, a precursor B background, and a precursor C background are set.

  The normal background is a blue background image (not shown). As shown in FIG. 13C, the precursor A background is a background image showing “sunny” in which a sun pattern is displayed on the upper right on a normal blue background. The precursor B background is a background image indicating “cloudy” in which a white cloud is displayed on a normal blue background, as shown in FIG. The precursor C background is a background image showing a "storm" in which a black rain cloud is displayed on a normal blue background and rain is displayed from the rain cloud as shown in FIG. 13E.

  As the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d increases, the ratio of selecting the precursor A background decreases, and the ratio of selecting the precursor B background and the precursor C background increases. When the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is 255 (that is, the number of winning balls (256 in the present embodiment) that causes the first prize opening 71 to win the distribution prize winning device 64). When the ball is entered), the precursor C background is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a.

  Specifically, when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is “0 to 60”, of the 199 values of the pseudo selection counter 223a, 30 are the precursor A background and 19 are the precursor A background. Nine backgrounds are assigned to the precursor C background. Similarly, when the value of the sub-distribution winning ball counter 223d is “61 to 149”, 25 are assigned to the precursor A background, 24 to the precursor B background, and nine to the precursor C background. When the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d is “150 to 200”, 10 are assigned to the precursor A background, 29 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 19 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the sub-distribution winning ball counter 223d is "201 to 254", six are assigned to the precursor A background, 33 to the precursor B background, and 29 to the precursor C background.

  In this way, when the value approaches “255” which is the value of the follow-up winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71, the precursor B background and the precursor C background are selected. The percentage to be set is large. If the value is “255” which is the value of the follow-up winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71, the precursor C background is selected. When a game ball wins at the starting port 71, the sign C background is often displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in many cases. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the first starting port 71 will win when the precursor C background is displayed.

  Further, when the precursor B background or the precursor C background is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player determines that the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 64 is displayed in the first starting port 71. The player can play the game expecting that the number of balls to be won (256 in the present embodiment) is close to winning. Further, since the selection ratio of the type of background selected by the number of balls entering the sorting prize device 64 is set to be changed, the current number of balls entering the sorting device 64 depends on the type of the selected background image. Can be provided with a fun that the player predicts. Therefore, even if the number of balls in the distribution winning device 64 is actually 50, if the precursor C background is selected and displayed, the player is not close to 256 in number of balls. It can be expected that the game can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Although the selection of the background image will be described later, in the background selection process (S1613 in FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the number of balls (remaining) in the sorting prize device 64 is determined. When the value of the in-prize-winning counter 223f is larger than 3, the background image is selected, and the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the selected background image.

  The RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is provided with at least a pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a sub-discharge ball count 223e, a sub-prize counter 223f, and another memory area 223g. ing.

  The pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is a counter used when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a pseudo symbol from the pseudo fluctuation table 222a or when selecting a background image from the background selection table 222b. The pseudo variation selection counter 223a is a counter value configured with a value in the range of 0 to 198, and is incremented by one in the main process (FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, and is updated. When 1 is added to the upper limit value “198”, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. When the power is turned on, the initial value is set to 0.

  The fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that a fluctuation pattern command of a special symbol has been received from the main control device 110. When the power is turned on, it is set to off, and in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received. If set, it is set to on. In the variable display setting process (S1611 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the setting is turned off.

  The stop type selection flag 223c is a flag indicating that a stop type command output by the main control device 110 has been received. When the game machine is powered on, it is set to off. If it is determined in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 that the stop type command output from the main control device 110 has been received, the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on. Is set. In the variable display setting process (S1611 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the setting is turned off.

  The subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is a counter that indicates the number of gaming balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64. When receiving the distributed prize ball number command output from the main controller 110, the subordinate distributed prize ball number counter 223d is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the sorting winning ball count command is a value indicating 0, the value obtained by subtracting 1 is 255. That is, the value “0 to 255” of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d corresponds to 1 to 256 game balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64 (the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d). 0 corresponds to 1). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to 0, and in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 31, S1614), the number of distributed winning prize balls output by the main control device 110 By receiving the command, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the sorting winning ball counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Various data stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is configured to be backed up for a predetermined period by a backup power supply when a power failure occurs.

  The second-distribution-discharged-ball counter 223e is a counter indicating the number of game balls that have been discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. When receiving the distributed ball count command output from the main control device 110, the sub-discharged ball count counter 223e is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the distribution / discharge number command is a command indicating 0, subtracting 1 gives 255. That is, the value “0-255” of the subordinate distributed ball discharge counter 223e corresponds to the number of game balls discharged from the distribution winning device 64, which is 1 to 256, respectively. A value of 0 corresponds to one). When the game machine is powered on, it is set to 0, and in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, the number of sorted discharge balls output by the main control device 110 When the command is received, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the sorting and discharging ball counter 203f stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  The follow-in prize counter 223f is a counter indicating the number of game balls entering (remaining) in the distribution prize device 64. In the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the receiving prize counter 223f is incremented by 1 when the distribution control prize ball number command output from the main control device 110 is received. When the minute ejection ball number command is received, 1 is subtracted. Therefore, when there is a game ball entering the sorting prize winning device 64, the counter value indicates the number thereof, and when there is no game ball in the sorting winning device 64, the counter value becomes 0. I have. The value of the in-prize prize counter 223f is used in the background selection process (S1613 in FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to change the background. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-prize-winning counter 223f is equal to or greater than 4 (a value greater than 3). If the value is equal to or greater than 4, a process of changing the background is executed.

  The other memory area 223g is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erasure switch (FIG. 5, 122). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  When the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is depressed when the power is turned on (while the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122)), the RAM erase switch circuit 253 backs up the data to the main controller 110. This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing data. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol and various lotteries such as selection of a winning or a variation pattern for the winning. For this reason, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery to determine whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed by sub-control. Since the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device performs the control, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box called a board box, which is made up of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is caulked with a member called a "sealing member" for preventing fraud so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark such as whether the member forming the through hole is destroyed or the sealing member is destroyed. .

  Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (FIG. 24) started upon power-on, a main process (S1200 in FIG. 27) executed after the start-up process, and a regular (this embodiment). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) started at a cycle of 2 milliseconds (FIG. 14) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 23) started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 24) and the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value is incremented by one to the upper limit value (109 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is incremented by 1 to the upper limit value (99 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the special symbol random number counter C1, the special symbol type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the special symbol random number counter C1, the special symbol type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum values (in this embodiment, , 109, 99, 100, 99), each is cleared to 0. When the special symbol random number counter C1 or the normal symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the special symbol random number counter C1 or the normal symbol random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the random number per symbol counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the random number counter for special symbol C1 or the random number counter for normal symbol C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the counter of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol change process for setting a special symbol (third symbol) change pattern and the like by the process for displaying the special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol (third symbol) by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). ). Next, a distribution prize process associated with a ball entering the distribution prize device 64 is executed (S105), and a distribution discharge process associated with the discharge of game balls from the distribution prize device 64 is executed (S106). Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (S107). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, the details of the distribution winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, and the details of the distribution discharge process (S106) will be described. The details of the start winning process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S107), a normal symbol variation process, which is a variation process of a normal symbol in response to a game ball passing through the normal symbol startup opening 67, is executed (S108). Is executed for the passing of the game ball (S109). The details of the ordinary symbol change process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the through gate process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for performing control relating to launching of a game ball is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S110) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. Then, when the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  Next, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104) performs various determinations and determinations based on each counter value that has acquired the special symbol, and performs the first symbol display device 37 in the variable display mode determined by predetermined control. And the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously perform control to enable variable display (dynamic display) or stop display in a display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating a determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (S201). When it is determined that the big hit is being made (S201: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not being performed (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202).

  When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202, No), it is determined whether new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203). If it is determined that no new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), a special symbol change start process is executed (S204). After that, this processing ends.

  The special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204), which will be described later in detail, performs a jackpot determination and a change pattern selection process based on various data newly stored in the special symbol execution area 203a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S202: Yes), the change pattern (dynamic change display mode) in which the special symbol is changed and displayed (dynamic display) is set. It is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed (S205). If it is determined that the current time is before the fluctuation time (S205: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S104: Yes), the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S206).

  Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S207). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the range (S207: No), the process is terminated. In addition, in the present embodiment, all the fluctuations of the special symbols are the big hits, so that the process of determining whether or not this is a big hit may be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the current lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S207: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B (S208). Here, the big hit type is determined by the special hit type table 202b shown in FIG. 9 based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 that has been acquired. If it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit A, 100 is set in the counter 203d during the time reduction (S209). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is the big hit B, 0 is set to the counter 203d during the time reduction (S210). Various settings (for example, the number of rounds, etc.) related to the start of the jackpot game are set (S211). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, a special symbol change start process (S204), which is one of the special symbol change processes (FIG. 15, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S204).

  In the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204), first, a distribution device error notification control process is executed (S301). The distribution device error notification control process (S301) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 17, but based on the current value of the distribution prize ball counter 203e, the first to the first prize devices 64 of the distribution prize device 64 will be described. The positions of the eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined, and the positions are compared with the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. If it is determined that they do not match, an error notification process is executed. This is the process to perform.

  The data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is obtained (S302). Based on the special symbol per random number table 202a, a big hit determination is executed for the value of the obtained special symbol per random number counter C1 (S303). It is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination executed in the process of S303 is a big hit (S304). When the result of the determination is a big hit (S304: YES), a display mode (LED display mode) on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit is set (S305). A big hit change pattern for changing and displaying the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is selected (determined) (S306).

Here, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, a normal special fluctuation pattern, a ceiling fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, as a jackpot fluctuation pattern selected based on winning in the first starting opening 71. , A special ceiling variation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed, and a switching special variation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed with a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern. In addition, as a variation pattern selected based on winning the second starting port 300, a special time-saving variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the normal special fluctuation pattern is a left, middle, and right symbol (in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not in the variable display mode). , 1 to 9) are displayed in a loop (1 → 2 →... → 9 → 1) in ascending order at a high speed. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is established, and only the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed. In the reach state, the sound “reach” is output from the sound output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the character "Achievement of heaven!" Is displayed below the area of the third symbol display device 81 where the special symbol is displayed, and the player receives 256 balls. Has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, and a notification indicating that the gaming ball has won a prize is displayed in the first starting port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has hit a big hit. In the present embodiment, if the gaming ball wins in the first starting port 71, the gaming machine always wins a jackpot. Therefore, the player recognizes that the winning in the first starting port 71 results in a big hit. . Therefore, the player determines that the number of balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are to be won in the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 is directly connected to the jackpot. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 in the sorting prize winning device 64 has entered the sorting prize winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the character “Arrival at heaven!”. Can be recognized as a jackpot. Note that the change time of the special change pattern is usually set to 15 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the gaming ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the special symbol variation display is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, as shown in FIG. , The pseudo symbol displayed at the upper left is replaced as it is as a special symbol, and a diagram in which the closed door is opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11B, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message “Arrived in heaven!” Is displayed below the special symbol. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. The ceiling special fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

  Note that the ceiling change pattern is the same time as the time required for the game ball to enter the first starting port 71 after entering the ball entry port 640 of the sorting prize device 64 (the time set at the time of design). The fluctuation time is set. Therefore, after the display of the fluctuation of the ceiling fluctuation pattern is started and the fluctuation time ends, the game ball will be awarded to the first starting port 71, so that the replacement with the special symbol is smoothly performed, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the change is a pseudo symbol change or a special symbol change, and can expect a big hit even with the pseudo symbol change display.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the switching special fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 12 when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern. In this way, the pseudo-design which has been displayed in a fluctuating manner disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. After that, the same special symbol on the left and right is displayed in the “reach state” in which the display is stopped, and the character “Arrival at heaven!” Is displayed. After that, the game is stopped and displayed with a special symbol of “777” to notify the player that the big hit has occurred. Note that the switching special fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling variation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a case of a jackpot, and even if the player does not have the ceiling variation pattern, the player has an expectation for the jackpot. Can be made. In addition, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give freshness and to pay attention to the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  The time-saving special fluctuation pattern is constituted by a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds, and is displayed in a state where predetermined symbols (for example, “777” or the like) are aligned with a double-eye pattern to notify that a big hit has occurred. Has become. With this configuration, the game time in the time-saving game state can be shortened, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early because the big hit occurs at short intervals. In addition, the game store can shorten the time during which the game balls are not consumed during the time-saving game, thereby increasing the sales.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination in step S303 is incorrect (S304: No), a determination error notification command is set (S307). In this embodiment, since the value is determined to be a hit for all the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol, if it is determined that the game machine is out of place, the gaming machine is illegally remodeled, Since the malfunction is considered, it is possible to notify the gaming machine of the abnormality of the gaming machine by setting the determination error notification command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the determination error notification command, an error process is performed so that a display indicating an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a character such as “determination error”).

  A variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is generated (S308). A stop type command is set (S309). In the present embodiment, only the jackpot stop type command is set as the stop type command.

  Next, the distribution device error notification control process (S301), which is one process of the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the distribution device error notification control process (S301).

  Based on the position of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 and the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e, it is checked whether the data is the same as the data set in the distribution role object position data 202i (S401). Here, the data set in the sorting role object position data 202i is compared with data corresponding to three values before and after the value of the sorting winning ball count counter 203e, and a process of checking whether the data is the same as any one is performed. Execute. Thereby, when there is a game ball remaining in the distribution prize device 64 (flowing down in the distribution prize device 64), the remaining game ball moves the distribution rotation member 64a1. In such a case, the position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 in the distribution role object position data 202i corresponding to three times before and after is also determined from the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. Thus, even in a normal game (a game in which a fraud or the like is not performed), a problem of notifying an error can be suppressed.

  If it is determined that the collation results do not match (S401: No), an error notification command is set (S408). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, the error notification command for display is set, and a display indicating an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the character of “character position error” is displayed). On the other hand, when it is determined that the matching results match (S401: No), the process of S402 is executed. Note that, in each of the processes from S402 to S408, as in the process in S401, the process of checking whether there is an abnormality at the positions of the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 is executed. The collation process is the same as that of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, the sorting device error notification control process (S301 in FIG. 17) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , May be configured to be executed only when the first starting port 71 is won. By configuring in this way, when the second starting port 300 is won, the control processing can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of collating the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is executed, but only the position of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is determined by the distribution winning prize ball number counter 203e. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the data corresponding to the sorting role object position data 202i corresponding to 0 (in the present embodiment, “0” indicating that the second storage unit 64d8 is facing upward). You may comprise.

  With such a configuration, after the game ball is guided to the first starting port 71 (the eighth guide path 64z16), the second accommodation portion 64d8 is in a state of being directed upward. By checking only that state, it can be easily determined whether the game ball has been normally guided to the first starting port 71 via the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8. Further, even if there is a game ball subsequently won in the distribution prize winning device 64, a large number of game balls need to be entered before the game ball reaches the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. The position of the distribution rotation member 64a8 can be determined and determined. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not fraud has been performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the error notification processing is executed when the collation does not match. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a processing for invalidating the jackpot may be executed, or the sound may be notified by voice or the like. Alternatively, a signal may be output to a hall computer or the like so that the player cannot identify it. With this configuration, the game store can recognize and respond to the notification of the fraud earlier. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the position of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is configured to be detected one by one. However, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined. It is configured to detect at one time, and the detected data ("10101010" indicating the position of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when 256 game balls enter when normal) ) And the initial position data 202h or the position data corresponding to 0 (256) of the distribution role position data 202i. With this configuration, it is possible to more easily check whether the position is normal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a description will be given of a distribution prize process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process (S105). In the sorting prize processing (S105 in FIG. 18), the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 64 is counted, and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the number of entered balls. A process for generating a distribution winning ball count command is executed. Hereinafter, the distribution winning process (S105 in FIG. 18) will be described.

  In the distribution prize processing (S105 in FIG. 18), first, it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize apparatus 64 (S501). If it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S501: Yes), the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e is acquired (S502). The value of the acquired winning prize ball number counter 203e is updated by adding 1, and the updated value is stored in the prize winning ball number counter 203e (S503). When the value of the acquired winning prize ball counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, adding 1 updates the initial value to 0. A distribution prize ball number command indicating the updated value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e is set (generated) (S504). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the entrance 640 (S501: No), the process is terminated.

  It is determined whether the value of the updated winning prize ball number counter 203e is a set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255) (S505). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first starting port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S505: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0. That is, the measurement start is set to the time from when the game ball that enters the first starting port 71 enters the first entry port 640 until the game ball enters the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S507). After that, this processing ends.

  With this configuration, the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 64 can be accurately determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The number of balls can be recognized, and an effect based on the number of game balls that have won the distribution prize device 64 can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the distribution discharge processing (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the distribution discharge processing (S106). The sorting discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) is a process for counting the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Be executed. Hereinafter, the distribution discharging process (FIG. 19, S106) will be described.

  In the distribution discharging process (FIG. 19, S106), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 (S601). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8 (S601: Yes), the distribution ball number counter 203f is acquired (S602). The value of the obtained number-of-discharged-balls counter 203f is updated by adding 1 to the value, and the updated value is stored in the number-of-discharged-balls counter 203f (S603). Note that the acquired value of the sorted discharge ball counter 203f is 255, and is updated to 0 when added and updated. A distributed discharge ball number command is set (generated) to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f (S604).

  As described above, by counting the number of game balls ejected from the sorting prize winning device 64 and checking the number of the game balls with the value of the sorting winning prize ball counter 203e, the game that has been illegally entered into the sorting prize winning device 64 is determined. It is possible to monitor whether there is a ball (for example, a game ball is introduced from any one of the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the start winning process (S107), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S107). The starting winning process (S107 in FIG. 20) is to determine whether a game ball has won the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, and if a winning has been achieved, the special symbol is fluctuated and stopped. A process of storing the acquired data such as the various counter values in the symbol execution area is executed. In addition, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, the flowing time of the game ball winning in the first starting port 71 after the game ball wins the distribution prize device 64 (in the present embodiment, (5 to 7 seconds), and if it is outside the set value, error processing is executed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 71 (start winning) (S701). Here, the winning in the first starting port 71 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 71 (there is a start winning) (S701: Yes), it is determined whether the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S702). When the distribution prize flag 203h is determined to be off (S702: No), a prize prize error notifying the audio lamp controller 113 that there is an abnormal prize in the first starting port 71. A command is set (generated) (S703). Here, the distribution prize flag 223h is a flag that is set to ON when the 256th game ball that will win the first starting port 71 in the distribution prize device 64 has entered. If the distribution prize flag 203h is off despite the determination that the game ball has won the first starting port 71, it is possible that the first starting port 71 has been incorrectly won. Perform error handling. Thereby, even when the sensor or the like of the first starting port 71 is turned on by an electromagnetic wave or the like from the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to detect the injustice and prevent the illegal jackpot from being obtained. .

  The distribution winning flag 203h is set to off (S704). It is determined whether the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is within a set value (5 seconds to 7 seconds in the present embodiment) (S705). In the present embodiment, the time required from passing through the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 to winning the first starting port 71 is designed to be 6 seconds. Therefore, by setting 1 second before and after as a set value, and setting 5 seconds to 7 seconds as a set value, in the case where an illegal operation is performed such that a piano wire or the like is wrapped around a game ball to reach the first starting port 71 illegally. Can detect fraud if the time required to reach the first starting port 71 is outside the set value.

  When it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is out of the set value (S705: No), the process of S703 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is within the set value (S705: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S706). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S706: Yes), the process of S703 is executed. Here, when a special ball is fluctuated by a game ball winning in the first starting port 71, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is usually the longest fluctuation pattern. Before the elapse of 10 seconds, it is usually impossible to win the first starting port 71 next. Therefore, if it is determined that the first starting port 71 has won while the special symbol is changing, By setting the winning error command, the gaming shop can recognize early that the gaming machine has an abnormality. Therefore, even if the first starting port 71 is awarded consecutively fraudulently, the gaming store side recognizes the fraudulently at an early stage, thereby reducing damage caused by the fraud.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S706: No), each value of the special symbol random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S707). When it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 71 (S701: No), the processing of S708 is executed.

  It is determined whether the game ball has won the second starting port 300 (S708). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 300 (S708: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 300 (S708: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S709). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S709), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S709: No), the values of the special symbol random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S710).

  As described above, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 71, whether or not the winning is a regular winning is determined based on the history of the winning in the sorting winning device 64 (the sorting winning flag 203h is on). Or not), the flow time of the winning game ball (the value of the distribution winning timer 203g), and whether the special symbol is fluctuating. If at least one does not match, a new counter value is newly added. By executing the error processing for setting the winning error command without acquiring the data of the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the illegal jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, it is difficult to allow the game balls to win the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 at the same time. Further, if a game ball wins simultaneously in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, the first starting port 71 is given priority. The game ball that has won the second starting port 300 is processed as an invalid ball while the special symbol is being changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S108). The normal symbol variation process (S108) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S801). The hitting of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the hit indicating is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 to when the opening / closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the normal electric accessory is performed. . When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S803). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S822 described later before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. Regardless of the time-saving game state and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set to a fluctuation time of 3 seconds for both the hit fluctuation pattern and the off fluctuation pattern.

  In the processing of S803, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S803 that the variation time of the ordinary symbol that has been variation displayed has elapsed (S803: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S804). . In the process of S804, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S817, the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S821, the “X” symbol is displayed as the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, and the stop symbol is displayed (lighting). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S804, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is set to the second symbol in the display mode set in the processes of S817 and S821. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S805). If it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols is a win (S805: Yes), the opening and closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set (806). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols this time is out of order (S805: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S802 that the ordinary symbol is not in the variable display mode (S802: No), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c (the number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol M) is acquired. (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S808). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S808: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S808: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S809).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S810). In the process of S810, the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area is obtained (S811).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203d during the working hours is 1 or more (that is, whether it is not 0) (S812). If it is determined that the value of the counter 203d during the time reduction is 0 (that is, it is not during the time reduction) (S812: No), the random number table 202c per normal symbol for non-time reduction (normal game state) (see FIG. 8C ) Is obtained based on the hit determination value (S1013) On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during the time reduction) (S812: Yes). It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S814) .If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S814: Yes), the process of S813 is executed. If it is determined that it is not in the middle (S814: No), it is determined based on the hit determination value of the random number per normal symbol table 202c (FIG. 8C) for the time saving (time saving gaming state). Result is obtained (S815).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S816). If it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S816: Yes), a display mode of “○” which is a display mode at the time of a hit is set (S817). The opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S820). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, the symbol is off) (S816: No), the display mode of “x” which is the display mode at the time of the off is set. Is performed (S819). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S822).

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S109). This through gate passage processing (S109) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, and when a game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per symbol.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 22, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S901). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not If it is not less than 4 (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the random number counter per normal symbol C4 acquired in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is set to the first of the empty reserved areas (normal symbol reserved 1 to ordinary symbol retained 4) in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S905). In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S910). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 24), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If the switch is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). (S1005: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1112 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5). Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 5) is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014).

  A distribution position initialization process is executed (S1015). The details of the distribution position initialization process (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. However, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64 are determined in advance. This is a process for setting an initial value. After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1010). After that, the interruption is permitted (S1011). Then, the processing shifts to a main processing (S1200 in FIG. 27) described later.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is in an initialized state when the power is turned on until the main control device 110 outputs a sorting winning ball count command or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the process of S1010 of the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the information backed up by the main control device 110 (for example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e) ) May be output as a backup command so that the audio lamp control device 113 backs up the MPU 221. With this configuration, the data and the like can be backed up to the state immediately before the power is turned off for the audio lamp control device 113 as well.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the distribution position initialization process (S1015), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are flowcharts showing the distribution position initialization processing (S1015).

  In the distribution position initialization processing (S1015 in FIGS. 25 and 26), first, the position of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is acquired from the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 (S1101). Here, the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and is not only the first distribution rotation member 64a1 but also the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2. The rotation angle of each of the rotation angles 64a8 to 64a8 can be detected. The rotation angle is set to have a positive value when the first storage portions 64c1 to 64c8 face upward, and to have a negative value when the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 face upward. Note that if the acquired value is a positive value, “1” is acquired, and if the acquired value is a negative value, “0” is acquired.

  The value acquired in the process of S1101 is the initial position data of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 stored in the distribution initial position data 202h (in the present embodiment, it indicates that the first storage unit 64c1 is facing upward. It is determined whether the value is the same as "1") (S1102). If it is determined that the obtained value is the same as the initial position data (S1102: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired value is different from the initial position data (S1102: No), the initial position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 stored in the distribution initial position data 202h (this embodiment Then, the distribution position adjustment motor 263 is set according to “10101010”) (S1103). In the present embodiment, the distribution position adjusting motor 263 is set so as to rotate the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rightward by a predetermined angle (in this embodiment, a position of plus 90 degrees).

  In the processing of S1104 to S1124, the initial positions of the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 are set similarly to the first distribution rotation member 64a1. Note that the initial position of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 is a position of minus 90 degrees where the second storage portion 64d2 faces upward, and the initial position of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is the first storage portion 64c3. Is a plus 90 degree position, which is a position facing upward, the initial position of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is a minus 90 degree position, which is a position where the second storage portion 64d4 is upward, and the fifth distribution rotation. The initial position of the member 64a5 is a position of plus 90 degrees where the first accommodation portion 64c5 faces upward, and the initial position of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is a position where the second accommodation portion 64d6 faces upward. A certain minus 90 degree position, an initial position of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is a plus 90 degree position where the first accommodation portion 64c7 is directed upward, and an initial position of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is 64d of 2nd accommodation part There are respectively set to the position of minus 90 degrees is a position facing upwards. The method of setting is the same as that of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated), the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are set to predetermined initial positions, respectively. Thereby, the gaming shop changes the state of the sorting prize winning device 64 to a state in which the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e containing no game ball is 0 (first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8). Is set to a position where game balls are guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15), the RAM erase switch 122 is operated to execute initialization of the RAM 203. , The distribution winning device 64 can also be automatically set to the initial state. Therefore, when a game store is opened, a plurality of gaming machines can be easily set to the same state (the same value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e).

  In the present embodiment, the initial position of the sorting prize winning device 64 is such that the winning ball number counter 203e in which no game ball has entered the sorting prize winning device 64 is 0. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The value of the number counter 203e is set to 255 (the position where the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game ball to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16), and immediately the first The starting port 71 may be configured to receive a prize to set a jackpot. With such a configuration, the gaming machine side can prepare a gaming machine to which a jackpot is immediately provided, and it is possible to attract a large number of customers who come to the store in search of such a gaming machine at the time of opening the store. It is possible to increase the number of customers coming to the store from the time of opening. It should be noted that the state of the sorting prize winning device 64 may be appropriately set by the game store using a switch or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the position of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is confirmed and the process of setting the initial value is performed. May be configured to forcibly set the distribution rotation member to an initial value. As described above, the initial setting process can be simplified by collectively performing the initial setting process regardless of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Therefore, the processing at power-on can be shortened.

  Next, a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process (FIG. 24) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), a process of updating a counter, a process of turning off the power, and a process of monitoring an abnormal prize to the distribution prize device 64 are roughly performed.

  In the main processing (S1200 in FIG. 27), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-sides. An external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  The prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1202, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, execution of various effects according to the big hit, a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. (S1203) A power jacking control process for controlling the opening and closing of the blades 300a and 300b of the motorized accessory attached to the second starting port 300 is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1204), the opening time of the electric accessory is usually set, and the opening time of the electric accessory is set. When the number of times of opening is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, a display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1205). The display control processing of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “例 え ば” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1206). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing the ball, and the second symbol display device 83 Thus, the variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the random number counter C4 per symbol, and when the second symbol is hit, the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory are opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, distribution error processing is executed (S1207). The distribution error processing (S1207) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 28. However, the difference between the game ball that has won the distribution prize device 64 and the game ball that has discharged is an abnormal set value (in this embodiment, In the case where the 256th game ball has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, the flowing time of the game ball is equal to or longer than the average number of seconds reached by the first starting port 71 (this embodiment). In the embodiment, a process of determining whether an abnormality has occurred is performed by determining whether or not it has elapsed (7 seconds or more).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes from S1201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1209: No), the initial time is maintained until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The update of the value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed (S1210).

  Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109, 99 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the main processing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the random number counter per special symbol) The initial value of C1 (the initial value of the random number counter C4 per symbol) can be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1208, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 23 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1211), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1208 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1201 to S1207, or at the end of one cycle of the process of S1210 performed within the remaining time. ing. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (FIG. 24, S1001) When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing in S1201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the distribution error process (S1207), which is one of the main processes (S1200 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing (S1207).

  In the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207), first, the value of the distribution ball number counter 203f is subtracted from the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e to be equal to or larger than the abnormal set value (in the present embodiment, 10 or more). ) Is determined (S1301). Note that the subtraction here is an operation for calculating the number of difference balls between the entered game ball and the discharged game ball. For example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 3, and the distribution is If the value of the discharged ball counter 203f is 254, the result of the subtraction is calculated as 5. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the sorting prize winning device 64 is 9 if it is a design value, and if it is larger than that, the ball is entered without passing through the entrance 640 (for example, the first ball). To allow the game ball to enter from any one of the eighth to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

  When it is determined that the difference between the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution ball counter 203f is equal to or larger than the abnormal set value (S1301: Yes), an error notification command is set (generated) (S1302). . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, it generates a display command for displaying a display mode (for example, a character such as “character abnormal winning error”) on the third symbol display device 81 indicating an abnormality.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference between the sorting prize ball number counter 203e and the sorting discharge sphere number counter 203f is less than the abnormal set value (S1301: No), the sorting prize flag 203h is set to ON. It is determined whether it is (S1303). If it is determined that the distribution prize flag 203h is set to off (S1303: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution prize flag 203h is set to ON (S1303: Yes), the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is acquired. One is added to the value of the obtained distribution winning timer 203g (S1305).

  It is determined whether the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is a value indicating the average number of seconds to reach (in transliteration mode, 7 seconds or more) (S1306). If it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is equal to or longer than the average number of seconds to reach (S1306: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1307). Note that the processing in S1307 is similar to the processing in S1302. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sorting prize timer 203g is less than the arrival average number of seconds (S1306: No), the process ends.

  In this way, the distribution error process (S1207 in FIG. 28) is executed at intervals of 4 ms, and it is determined whether or not the distribution prize device 64 has an abnormality. As soon as it is determined that a game ball exceeding the design value has entered the sorting winning device 64 (there is a difference between the number of entered balls and the number of ejected balls), error processing can be executed. Therefore, fraud and abnormalities of the pachinko machine 10 can be found at an early stage. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be further reduced.

  Further, when it is determined that the number of game balls (256 in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are to be won in the first starting port 71 in the distribution prize device 64 has been entered, the game is executed. Since the time until the ball reaches the first starting port 71 is configured to be monitored, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is always compared with the case where the flow time of the entered game ball is monitored. Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the number of cases where the difference between the number of balls hit and the number of balls discharged to the sorting prize winning device 64 is determined to be abnormal is set to a preset value, but is not limited thereto and can be set by the game store. A configuration in which a setting switch or the like is provided may be employed. With this configuration, it can be adjusted and set in accordance with a change in the ratio of the game balls entering the distribution prize device 64 (frequency of entry) due to adjustment of the game nail or the like. Therefore, the abnormality can be monitored with the abnormality set value that is more suited to the state of the pachinko machine 10, and the abnormality can be accurately detected.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process (S1600) executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process (FIG. 29) is executed, first, an initial setting process upon power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1619 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1616 in FIG. 30), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1619. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1619 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1619 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure and after the execution of the power-off process in S1619 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, since the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S169, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1506). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1619 (see S1618 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1619 is executed, the process of S1508 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1619 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1508 is performed through steps S1504 to S1506. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510).

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1509 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1504 to S1508 via the process of S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1504. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1600). When the main processing (S1600) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing (S1600) was started or since the previous processing of S1601 was executed (S1600). (S1601) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The processes in S1602 to S1610 are related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1611 and the command determination processing in S1614 in a short cycle. By performing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform setting related to the variable display effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process, and by performing the process of S1614 in a short cycle, Omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110 can be prevented.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1609 described later (S1603), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1604). . The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. Sent to 114. In the held number display update process (S1606), a process of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of the sub-order rearrangement held storage area 223k will be described in detail later. .

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of S1611. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1610), a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1611, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting processing (S1611), the pseudo fluctuation processing is executed (S1612). The pseudo fluctuation processing (S1612) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but a pseudo fluctuation pattern (pseudo dynamic display) of a pseudo symbol to be displayed in a fluctuation (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81. Is determined, and a process of generating a pseudo fluctuation pattern for display indicating the determined fluctuation pattern is executed.

  After the pseudo fluctuation processing (S1612), the background selection processing is executed (S1613). This background selection processing (S1613) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 35, but it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied. In the case of changing the background image, a process for determining the type of the background image to be changed is executed.

  A command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S1614). Details of the command determination processing (S1614) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1614 ends, processing of updating each counter that adds 1 to the counter value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed (S1615). It is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1618), and the power-off processing is executed (S1619). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1620), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The storage of the information on the occurrence of power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1617), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1617: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process (S1600) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1617: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing (S1600) is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, for convenience of description, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described first with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (S1600 in FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. I do. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S1614) will be described.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from main controller 110 (S1701). Here, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation display mode for varyingly displaying a special symbol. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1702). The type (type) of the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1703). The type of the variation pattern extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) described later. This is used when setting a special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the special symbol variation display effect and the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON when the stop type command has been received. When the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON. (S1705). The type of stop (either big hit A or big hit B) is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is determined whether or not a distribution winning prize ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). If it is determined that the distributed prize ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the number of prize balls indicated by the received distributed prize ball number command is extracted, and a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the extracted value is used as a subordinate. It is stored (stored) in the minute winning ball counter 223d (S1708). Here, if the value of the sorting winning ball counter 223d is 0, subtracting 1 gives 255. The value of the in-prize prize counter 223f is acquired, the value is updated by adding 1 to the value, and stored in the in-prize prize counter 223f (S1709).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distributed prize ball number command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1707: No), it is determined whether the distributed sphere number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707: No). S1710). If it is determined that the command of the number of discharged balls is received from the main controller 110 (S1710: Yes), the number of discharged balls is extracted from the received command of number of discharged balls and the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the command is used. It is stored in the distribution ball number counter 223e (S1711). Here, if the command of the number of sorted and discharged balls is a command indicating 0, subtracting 1 results in 255. The value of the during-prize-winning counter 223f is acquired, and a value updated by subtracting 1 from the value is stored in the under-prize-winning counter 223f (S1712).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sorting and ejection ball count command has not been received (S1710: No), it is determined whether an error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713). When it is determined that the error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713: Yes), the display error notification command is set (generated) (S1714). The error notification command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the contents of the error in characters based on the type of the error notification command output by the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no error notification command has been received (S1713: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S1715). When it is determined that the ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S1715: Yes), the ending setting process is executed (S1717). The ending setting process (S1717) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 32, but is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the executed jackpot game (either the jackpot A or the jackpot B). A process of setting an ending screen to be performed is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received from main controller 110 (S1716: No), a process according to another command is executed (S1716).

  Next, an ending setting process (S1719), which is a process of the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1719).

  In the ending setting process (FIG. 32, S1719), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot being executed is the jackpot A (shift to the time-saving gaming state after the 16R jackpot) (S1801). When it is determined that the running big hit is the big hit A (S1801: Yes), the time-saving effect display (FIG. 13A) is set as the ending effect display mode (ending image) (S1802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is the jackpot B (shift to the normal game state after the 16R jackpot) (S1801: No), the display mode of the ending effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Then, the normal effect display (FIG. 13B) is set (S1803). The display ending command indicating the set ending effect is set (generated).

  In the time reduction effect display, as shown in FIG. 13A, a character “Entering Makai Mode” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the time saving game state is notified by the name of the Makai mode, and the player is notified of the time saving game state. In addition, in the normal effect display, as shown in FIG. 13B, the character “entering the heavenly challenge mode” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the normal game state (non-time saving game state) is notified by the name of the heavenly challenge mode. The player recognizes that the heavenly challenge mode will be shifted to a game in which the distribution prize device 64 enters a ball until the game ball is awarded in the first starting port 71 (in a game effect, the player reaches the heavens).

  In the present embodiment, the player determines for the first time whether the executed jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B based on the display mode of the ending. As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot being executed is not the jackpot A until just before the jackpot ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1611), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 30, performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1611).

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223b is off (S1901: No), the process of S1909 is executed because the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223b is on (S1901: Yes), the change start flag 223b is set to off (S1902).

  In the third symbol display device 81, it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped and displayed (S1903: No), the fluctuation in the fluctuation display effect of the special symbol extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1703 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614). The pattern is obtained from the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 (S1904).

  On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S1903: Yes), the pseudo symbol variation pattern of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is as follows. It is determined whether the pattern is a ceiling variation pattern (S1905). When it is determined that the pseudo variation pattern displayed variably on the third symbol display device 81 is the ceiling variation pattern (S1905: Yes), a special ceiling variation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1906). On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation pattern displayed variably on the third symbol display device 81 is not the ceiling fluctuation pattern (S1905: No), the switching special fluctuation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1907). A display variation pattern command corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is set (generated) (S1908).

  It is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON (S1909). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is off (S1909: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1909: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off (S1910).

  In the processing of S1706 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614), the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set (S1911). A display stop type command corresponding to the set stop type is set (S1912).

  As described above, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, if the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a variable manner, the pseudo pattern is replaced with the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the special ceiling variation pattern or the switching special variation pattern is selected. Thereby, the display mode of the special symbol can be matched with the display mode linked to the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the fluctuating display with the pseudo symbol and the fluctuating display with the special symbol, and it is possible to expect the big hit even with the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a description will be given of the pseudo-variation process (S1612), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 30, performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113). FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pseudo fluctuation processing (S1612). The pseudo fluctuation process (FIG. 34, S1612) is a process for determining a fluctuation pattern of a pseudo symbol to be displayed in a fluctuation manner on the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, the pseudo fluctuation processing (FIG. 34, S1612) will be described.

  In the pseudo fluctuation process (FIG. 34, S1612), first, it is determined whether the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol in a variable display (S2001). When it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S2001: Yes), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2001: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2002). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S2002: Yes), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2002: No), it is determined in the processing of S1707 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614) that the distribution winning prize ball number command has been received. It is determined whether it is (S2003). When it is determined that the distribution winning ball count command has been received (S2003: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is obtained (S2004). Based on the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d acquired in the processing of S2004, the pseudo fluctuation pattern is selected (determined) from the pseudo fluctuation table 222e (see FIG. 10A). (S2005). A pseudo fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (generated) (S2006). On the other hand, if it is determined that the sorting winning ball count command has not been received (S2003: No), this processing ends.

  As described above, when the special symbol and the pseudo symbol are not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the distribution winning prize ball number command is received (that is, the game is inserted into the entrance 640 of the distribution winning prize device 64). When the ball has entered), the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbol is selected, and the start of the pseudo-variation display of the pseudo symbol is set. Therefore, the player feels as if the lottery game has started as if the game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64, and the fluctuation display of the pseudo symbol is changed to the special symbol fluctuation display. It feels as if it is, and you can see the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol with the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, even if the player is skilled in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is determined by the ratio of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern to be selected (selection) based on the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d. Are set so as to be different from each other, the number of game balls that have won the current distribution prize device 64 can be predicted based on the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected and its frequency. Therefore, even if the player knows that the fluctuation is a pseudo symbol, the player can obtain more important information related to the jackpot than the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, and is more interested in the display of the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol. You can play games.

  Next, the background selection process (S1613), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 30, performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the background selection processing (S1613). The background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) determines whether to change the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and executes the process of determining the background image to be changed. Hereinafter, the background selection processing (FIG. 35, S1613) will be described.

  In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613), first, the value of the during-prize-winning counter 223f is larger than 3, that is, the number of game balls entering (remaining) in the distribution prize device 64. Is determined to be four or more (S2101). When it is determined that the number of game balls entering the sorting prize winning device 64 is four or more (S2101: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is obtained (S2102). A background pattern is selected from the background selection table 222f (see FIG. 10B) based on the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d acquired in the process of S2102 (S2103). . A display background command corresponding to the selected background pattern is set (generated) (S2104). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-prize-winning counter 223f is 3 or less (S2101: No), the process ends.

  As described above, when the number of game balls entering the sorting prize winning device 64 is four or more, the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be changed. At an appropriate timing, the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. The selected background image is the percentage of the type of the background image selected by the number of game balls (the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d) that has entered the distribution prize device 64 (the selected background image). Is set to be changed, the background image to be selected is a hint for the player to predict the number of balls in the distribution prize device 64 for the player. Can be interested.

  In addition, the background image selected when the 256th game ball that will win the first starting port 71 enters the sorting winning device 64 is limited to the precursor C background (FIG. 13C). Therefore, when the precursor C background is selected, it can be expected that the first starting port 71 will be won. Therefore, the player can be interested in the background image in addition to the jackpot, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  As described above, a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) of game balls wins in the distribution prize device 64, so that a big hit is always given to the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the damage to the player from becoming excessively large.

  Further, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the player may be bored with the game before a predetermined number of the prize wins in the sorting prize winning device 64, but a pseudo symbol configured in a display mode similar to the special symbol is concerned. By causing the distribution prize device 64 to start the variation display at the timing when the game ball enters, the player can enjoy the variation display of the pseudo symbol as if the variation of the special symbol had started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, when a game is started by another person or at the time of opening a store, it is not possible to determine how many game balls are in the sorting prize winning device 64, but the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is not changed. The frequency (ratio) of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected based on the number of game balls (the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d) that has entered the winning prize device 64 is set to be changed. Therefore, it is possible to predict the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64 from the type of the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the variable display of the pseudo symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), the jackpot does not occur until a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) enters the sorting prize winning device 64. When the game state is reached, the ball can enter the second starting port 300 and the jackpot is provided to the player early, so that the sense of speed until the big hit between the normal game state and the time-saving game state is obtained. By making the difference greatly, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with a stronger desire to shift to the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. In addition, it is possible for the player to enjoy a game type that is significantly different between the normal game state and the time reduction game state.

  In addition, the configuration is such that a big hit is achieved by winning the first starting port 71. However, when the first starting port 71 is won, after the ball enters the entrance port 640 of the sorting winning device 64, By judging whether the arrival time before winning the first starting port 71 is appropriate or the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are appropriate, a jackpot due to fraud is determined. It can be suppressed from being given. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is counted to count the number of entries (the number of entries to the ceiling) required to win the first starting port 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made based on the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform the process of counting the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640, so that the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, after the distribution rotation member guides the game ball, it returns to the position before the guide (for example, after the game ball is received by guiding the game ball in a state where the first storage unit is facing upward). The first accommodating portion is directed upward again due to too strong momentum or the vibration of the pachinko machine 10). The problem that the state (position) shifts can be suppressed, and the number of incoming balls required to reach the first starting port 71 can be determined based on the current position of the distribution rotation member.

  Further, the count value of the entrance 640 and the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are collated at fixed intervals or the like, and the count values are collated and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a1. The correction may be made based on the position of 64a8. In such a case, if the collation result is corrected differently for a predetermined number of times or more, an error notification is issued, and the amusement shop side can confirm whether improper operation has been performed or a malfunction has occurred due to a failure. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the count value of the entrance 640 and the states of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 can be accurately matched, and accurate control of production and the like can be performed. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are configured with eight distribution rotation members, each position can be indicated by 1-bit data, and a total of 8 bits can be represented. Since data can be configured, data can be easily transmitted and received.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the number of balls to be entered into the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64, and a game ball is entered into the first starting port 71. A case has been described in which, when a jackpot is reached, a game ball is fired toward the specific winning port 65a in the right area of the game area where the game ball does not easily enter the distribution winning device 64.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the sorting winning device 64, and when a big hit occurs, the game ball enters the sorting winning device 64 during the big hit. Configuration. In addition, depending on the jackpot type, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are set at predetermined positions by lottery after the jackpot game, whereby the sorting winning device 64 after the jackpot game is set. The number of balls required to win the first starting port 71 is variably set. In addition, the sorting prize winning device 64 is usually provided with two motorized accessories, and differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when each is opened, a game ball is guided to a predetermined sorting rotating member. I do.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the second symbol display device 83 is provided with a display unit for displaying the result of determining whether or not the first ordinary symbol is correct, with "O" and "X" arranged side by side. Below this, display sections for displaying the result of the determination of the success / failure of the second ordinary symbol are provided side by side with “O” and “X”. In addition, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the game balls that have won the first ordinary symbol opening 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol opening 67s2. A display unit that indicates the number of reserved balls, which is a number, by a lighting state is set.

  The variable prize device 65 provided at the lower right side of the game area is provided at the upper left of the distribution prize device 64 at the center of the game area. At the lower right side of the game area, a general winning opening 63 is arranged. On the right side surface of the sorting prize winning device 64, a first blade 64s1 of a first ordinary electric accessory, which is an ordinary electric accessory, and a second blade 64s2 of a second ordinary electric accessory, are provided.

  In the normal game state (a game state other than the big hit game state), the player rotates the operation handle 51 to the right to the maximum to fire the game ball with the maximum firing force, thereby forming the right game area ( The game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80). Then, the game ball is fired so that the game ball enters the first normal symbol start port 67s1, the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and the entrance 640. On the other hand, when the big hitting game state is reached, the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the left game area (left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39, during the big hit game, the variable prize device 65 rotates the opening / closing plate downward to the front side for a predetermined period so that the game ball flowing down the game area is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Upon receipt, the user is guided to the specific winning opening 65a. When the opening / closing plate is pivoted downward, its rotation is regulated slightly more than 90 degrees on the specific winning opening 65a side (about 85 to 88 degrees), and the opening / closing plate is inclined in the direction of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the shape of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate has a tapered surface 65 s inclined toward the right end, and the game ball falling on the tapered surface is guided to the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64. It is configured to:

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is more likely to enter the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 than in the normal game state (game state other than the jackpot game). Therefore, when the 256th game ball enters the distribution prize device 64 and wins at the first starting port 71 and a jackpot is won, the game ball is supplied to the distribution prize device 64 while playing a jackpot game. By making the ball enter, after the jackpot game, the game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 64 to some extent, and the remaining number of balls up to the 256th ball can be reduced. Therefore, the next hit can be given to the player at an early stage.

  In addition, by slightly firing the game balls, the game balls can be adjusted so that the game balls hardly fall on the tapered surface 65s (the game balls flow near the left side of the variable prize device 65). When it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the payout device 64 approaches 256, which is to win the first starting port 71, the firing force of the game balls is reduced by adjusting the operation handle 51 by adjusting the operation handle 51. When 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64 during the jackpot, and the first starting port 71 receives a prize during the jackpot game, the prize to the first starting port 71 becomes an invalid ball. This is a configuration that can prevent such a situation. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the judgment of the player and the game method, so that the player can concentrate on playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In addition, by setting the jackpot to be performed consecutively at the upper limit (for example, 5 times), it is possible to set so that the firing of the game ball cannot be weakly adjusted, and the first starting port 71 can be intentionally awarded during the jackpot. May be configured. By doing so, an upper limit can be set for the number of consecutive jackpots, and it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the distribution winning device 64 has a first blade 64s1 provided diagonally above the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 on the right side, and a second blade 64s1 diagonally above the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Each of the blades 64s2 is provided. Each of the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees around the lower end portion of the distribution winning device 64 by a solenoid. The first blade 64s1 is configured to always stand vertically and close the first normal ball entrance 640s1 through which a game ball formed on the right side of the sorting prize device 64 can pass, and the first normal When the symbol hits, the game ball is rotated about 45 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the first normal entrance. Further, the second blade 64s2 is configured similarly to the first blade 64s1. Each of the first normal ball entrance 640s1 and the second normal ball entrance 640s2 is constituted by a gate type sensor capable of detecting that a game ball has passed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 38, a game in which the first blade 64s1 rotates and enters the first ordinary entrance 640s1 inside the distribution winning device 64, as shown in FIG. A first ordinary guidance path 64m1 for guiding the ball to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is provided. The first normal taxiway 64m1 is formed of a wall protruding toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and forms a taxiway on which a game ball can roll. A fifth facing member 64t5 is provided above the first normal taxiway 64m1 so as to form a width that allows a game ball to pass between the first normal taxiway 64m1 and the first normal taxiway 64m1. Even if the momentum of the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 is strong, it collides with the fifth facing member 64t5, and further, the game ball flows down in the direction of the sixth discharge port 650a6 without being guided by the fifth facing member 64t5. Also, the game is guided to the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 by the first ordinary guide path 64m1 (preventing the game ball from reaching the sixth outlet 650a6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6 without passing through the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the player. In addition, game balls that have entered the second normal entrance 640s2 are also provided with the second ordinary taxiway 64m2 similarly to game balls that have entered the first ordinary entrance 640s1. The second ordinary taxiway 64m2 is configured similarly to the first ordinary taxiway 64m1.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game area, there are provided a first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough and a second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 immediately below the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1. Two nails are arranged above the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 so as to oppose each other. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the amount of game balls entering the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 ( (Ease of entering a ball) can be adjusted. Also, the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 have the same shape, are arranged vertically in series, and the game ball that has entered the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 is 2 It is configured to be easy to enter the ball into the normal symbol starting port 67s2.

  In addition, the second symbol display device 83 has a first ordinary symbol display portion 83a in which the first ordinary symbol is variably displayed based on a winning start in the first ordinary symbol opening 67s1 and a second ordinary symbol opening 67s2. A second ordinary symbol display section 83b for variably displaying a second ordinary symbol based on a winning start is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 are arranged vertically in series. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The variable display device unit 80 may be disposed on the left and right sides of the game area with the variable display device unit 80 interposed therebetween, or may be disposed at a desired position as appropriate.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has the normal symbol random number table 202c deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol random number table 202c1, a second random number per design symbol table 202c2, a status selection table 202k, and a random number setting table 202m are respectively added.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first random number per normal symbol table 202c1 is a normal symbol acquired when a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start-up opening 67s1 in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). It is a data table in which a random number value of a normal symbol per random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is stored for the hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, as the random number determined to be a hit, a value in the range of “5 to 7” is set as the hit random value in the first ordinary symbol-per-random number table 202c1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with no time reduction game.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the second normal symbol per random number table 202c2 is a normal symbol acquired when a game ball passes through the second normal symbol start-up opening 67s2 in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). It is a data table in which a random number value of a normal symbol per random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is stored for the hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, a value of “3” is set as a hit random number value in the second ordinary symbol-per-hit random number table 202c2 as a random value determined to be a hit. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with no time reduction game.

  The special hit type table 202b is different from the special hit type table 202b in the first embodiment in that the big hits C to F are set in correspondence with the values of the special hit type counter C2 instead of the big hit A and the big hit B. I have. The big hit C is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0 to 19. The jackpot C is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of five rounds is executed. After the jackpot, a random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  The big hit D is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 20 to 35. The jackpot D is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of five rounds is executed. After the jackpot, the random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is not executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  The big hit E is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 36 to 39. The jackpot E is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of 16R rounds is executed. After the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are randomly set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is not executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  The big hit F is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 40 to 99. The jackpot F is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of 16 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are randomly set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the status selection table 202k is a data table in which the values of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e and the value of the status selection counter 203m described later are assigned to the statuses A to E. . In the status determination processing (S513 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the value of a random counter 203q described later is a status change value (in the present embodiment, any of 0 to 39) The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k based on the values of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the status selection counter 203m.

  As shown in FIG. 45B, the random number setting table 202m indicates that the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 set in the initial state is 0, 100, 200, or 255. This is a data table in which the value of the random counter 203p is set for each piece of position information on the number of incoming balls of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Specifically, if the value of the random counter 203p is in the range of 0 to 24, the first to eighth swings when the number of balls in the sorting and prize winning device 64 is 0 (or 256). The position information “10101010” of each of the minute rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is selected. Similarly, if the value is in the range of 25 to 29, the position information “100001100” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 100 is selected. If the value is in the range of 30 to 89, the position information “10111001” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 200 is selected. If the value is in the range of 90 to 99, the position information “01010101” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 255 is selected.

  In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203c, and the counter for the time reduction 203d are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol is deleted. The reserved ball storage area 203b1, the second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2, the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1, the second ordinary symbol retained ball number counter 203c2, the first ordinary flag 203j1, the second ordinary flag 203j2, A first general-purpose timer 203k1, a second general-purpose timer 203k2, a status selection counter 203m, a status storage area 203n, a random counter 203p, a distribution position storage area 203q, and a distribution maintenance flag 203r are respectively added.

  The first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is a storage area for storing an ordinary symbol random number counter C4 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 41) in accordance with detection of a winning start in the first ordinary symbol starting opening 67s1. It is. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start-up port 67s1 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 49), the random number per normal symbol is read from the counter buffer. The value of the counter C4 is obtained and stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. The first ordinary symbol flag provided in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is set to ON and stored (stored). The first ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b1 stores four retaining areas so that data (a value of the counter C4, the first ordinary symbol flag) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (reserved) up to a maximum of four times. Have. In the first ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b1, the data of the retaining balls is stored in the order of passing through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (starting winning) in the empty area where the data is emptied. It is stored in order from the area (reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved balls).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described first normal to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each winning start (value of the normal winning random number counter C4) stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. Is shifted to the first ordinary symbol holding ball execution area provided in the game. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The second ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b2 is a storage area for storing an ordinary symbol random number counter C4 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 41) in accordance with detection of a winning start in the second ordinary symbol starting opening 67s2. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, detailed description is omitted.

  The first ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 passes a game ball through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (see FIG. 49). Based on the “start winning prize”, the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) is determined. The counter counts up to four times. The first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is a counter that stores the total number of retained balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process (S1014 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 54, S839).

  The second ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls that the game ball has passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2. Since the configuration is similar, detailed description is omitted.

  The first ordinary power flag 203j1 is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal ball entry process (S116 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to ON based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal ball entry 640s1. On the other hand, the value of the first general-purpose timer 203k1 that measures the time from when the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1 described later is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (5 seconds in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the time has elapsed, it is set to off. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the first ordinary power flag 203j1 is set to off.

  The second ordinary power flag 203j2 is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2. The ON / OFF setting is executed in the same manner as the first ordinary power flag 203j1, although the difference is in that it relates to the second normal entrance 640s2. The second ordinary power flag 203j2 is set to OFF when the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (2s in the present embodiment).

  The first general-purpose timer 203k1 is a timer for measuring a flowing time after the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal entrance processing (S116 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1, the value is set to 0, and thereafter, While the first general power flag 203j1 indicating that a game ball has passed through one normal entrance 640s1 is set to ON, one is added each time the normal entrance processing (S116 in FIG. 56) is executed. Being updated. The first general-purpose timer 203k1 is incremented by one every 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 49). The second general-purpose timer 203k2 is a timer that measures the time that the game ball has flowed since the game ball passed through the second normal entrance 640s2. Although different in that it relates to the second ordinary entrance 640s2, processing such as updating is executed in the same manner as the first ordinary power timer 203k1. In the present embodiment, the first ordinary power timer 203k1 or the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is reset to 0 when the first ordinary flag 203j1 or the second ordinary flag 203j2 is set to ON. The configuration is not limited to this, but may be configured to be reset to 0 when the first ordinary power flag 203j1 or the second ordinary power flag 203j2 is set to off.

  The status selection counter 203m is a counter for selecting a status from the status selection table 202k shown in FIG. The status selection counter 203m is configured by a counter value updated in a range of “0 to 198”. The status selection counter 203m is incremented and updated one by one in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (S1200 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When 1 is added to 198 which is the upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0 which is an initial value.

  The random counter 203p selects the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64 set after the jackpot C and the jackpot F described later from the random number table shown in FIG. 45B. It is a counter for. The random counter 203p is configured with a counter value updated in a range of “0 to 99”. The random counter 203p is incremented and updated one by one in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (S1200 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When 1 is added to 99 which is the upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. When the RAM 203 is initialized, 0, which is an initial value, is set.

  In the distribution position storage area 203q, when there is no game ball flowing down inside the distribution prize winning device 64, respective position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is stored. It is a storage area. The position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q is such that the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are changed in a state where the game balls do not flow down the distribution prize device 64. It is used to monitor whether illegal activities have been performed. Specifically, in the sorting error processing 2 (S1320 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the difference between the sorting winning ball number counter 203e and the sorting discharging ball number counter 203f is 0 (that is, the difference is 0). When it is determined that there is no game ball flowing down in the distribution prize device 64), the respective positional information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64 at that time is stored. Is done.

  At this time, the position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q is determined by the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 as a plus rotation angle (when the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 are turned to the right with the positions of the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 facing vertically upward as the origin, Is stored, and "0" is stored if the rotation angle is a negative rotation angle. After 256 game balls have entered the distribution prize device 64 and have won the first starting port 71, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is determined by the first distribution. The position information is stored as “10101010” in order from the position information of the rotating member 64a1.

  The distribution maintaining flag 203r is a flag indicating that the game balls are not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. The distribution maintaining flag 203r indicates that the difference between the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e and the distribution discharge sphere counter 203f in the distribution error process 2 (S1320 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When it is determined that the value is 0 (that is, a state in which the game ball does not flow down in the distribution winning device 64), it is set to ON. On the other hand, when it is determined in the sorting prize processing 2 (S112 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 in the sorting prize device 64, the game is turned off. Is set. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is turned off.

  In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, the contents of the pseudo fluctuation table 222a and the background selection table 222b are changed from those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pseudo fluctuation table 222a in the first embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation patterns are set for the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d, respectively. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the point that the pseudo fluctuation pattern is set for the status of the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 has been changed.

  In the background selection table 222b of the first embodiment, the background pattern is set for each value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d, whereas in the background selection table 222b of the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in a), the point that the background pattern is set for the status of the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 has been changed.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, the subordinate pay-out ball counter 223d, the subordinate discharge ball counter 223e, and the sub-prize counter 223f are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. , A sub status storage area 223h, a normal variation flag 223i, and a background change counter 223j.

  The slave status storage area 223h is a storage area for storing a status type (status information) indicated by the received status command based on receiving a status command output from the main control device 110.

  The normal fluctuation flag 223i is a flag indicating that a normal symbol hit fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received. In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed by the MPU 221 to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received, it is set to ON. Is done. On the other hand, in the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, when the interrupt normal pseudo fluctuation pattern or the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2024 or S2025), it is turned off. Is done. Note that when the RAM 223 is initialized, it is turned off.

  The background change counter 223j is a counter value for determining whether to change a background pattern (background image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The background change counter 223j is a counter value updated in the range of “0 to 99”. In the process of S1615 of the main process (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, the value is incremented by one and updated. When 1 is added to 99 which is the upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. The background selection counter 223j is a counter value acquired in the background selection process 2 (S1650 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the second embodiment (FIG. 49) is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in that the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104) is replaced with the special symbol change process 2. (FIG. 50, S111) replaces the distribution prize processing (FIG. 18, S105), and the distribution prize processing 2 (FIG. 52, S112) replaces the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S108), and replaces the first ordinary. The symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) and the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) are replaced with the through gate passage process (FIG. 22, S109), and the through gate passage process 2 (FIG. 55, S115) is normally entered. A mouth passing process (FIG. 56, S116) is added. The processes in S101 to S103, S107, and S110 to S111 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S101 to S103, S107, and S110 to S111 in the first embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 50, in the second embodiment, a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111). The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111) of the second embodiment is different from the special symbol change start process (FIG. 15, S104) of the first embodiment in the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204). , The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is replaced by the processes of S209 and S210, and the processes of S320 and S330 are respectively added. The processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S203, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is executed. The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 51, executes a process required to start the change of the special symbol.

  In the process of S208, it is determined what the determined jackpot type is, and if it is the jackpot C or the jackpot D, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 5 (S320). On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot E or the jackpot F, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 16 (S330). Thereafter, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S211).

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, in the second embodiment, special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 50, S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. The special symbol change start process 2 (S310), which is one of the processes, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (S310 in FIG. 51). The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) of the second embodiment is different from the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204) of the first embodiment in the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, FIG. 17). S301) has been deleted. As for the other processing, the same processing as the special symbol change starting processing (S204 in FIG. 16) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 52, in the second embodiment, a distribution prize process 2 (FIG. 52, S1112) which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the distribution prize processing 2 (FIG. 52, S112). The distribution prize processing 2 (S112 in FIG. 52) of the second embodiment is different from the distribution prize processing in the first embodiment (S105 in FIG. 18) in that it is determined that a game ball has entered the distribution prize device 64. Then, it is different in that a process of whether or not to change the status is executed.

  In the distribution prize processing 2 (S112 in FIG. 52), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize apparatus 64 (S511). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S511: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to OFF (S512). After that, a status determination process is executed (S513). The status determination processing (S513) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53. However, it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the status type is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the status type is changed. A process for determining is executed.

  The value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is obtained (S514). One is added to the value of the obtained distribution winning ball counter 203e and updated (S515). When the value of the acquired winning prize ball counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, adding 1 updates the initial value to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the entrance 640 (S511: No), the process ends.

  It is determined whether the updated value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is a set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 which is updated by adding 1 from 255) (S516). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first starting port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S516: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0 (S517). That is, the measurement start is set to the time from when the game ball that enters the first starting port 71 enters the first entry port 640 until the game ball enters the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S518). After that, this processing ends.

  In this embodiment, each time a game ball enters the entrance 640, the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to OFF regardless of ON or OFF, but only when ON. , May be set to off.

  Next, referring to FIG. 53, in the second embodiment, a status determination process (S513) which is one process of the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. I do. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this status determination processing (S513).

  In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513), first, the value of the random counter 203p is obtained (S521). It is determined whether the acquired value of the random counter 203p is a status change value (in the present embodiment, any one of 0 to 39) (S522). When it is determined that the value is the status change value (S522: Yes), the value of the status selection counter 203m is acquired (S523). The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k (FIG. 44 (a)) based on the acquired values of the status selection counter 203m and the distribution winning ball counter 203e (S524). A status command is set (generated) based on the determined status type (S525). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired value of the random counter 203p is not the status change value (S522: No), the process ends.

  In this way, every time a game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize winning device 64, whether or not to change (determine or update) the status is determined by lottery, so that the status is random. Can be changed at the opportunity.

  In the status selection table 202k, the ratio of the selected status type is changed according to the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. Further, since the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set so that the ratio of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected according to the type of the status is different, the player performs the fluctuation display. The number of game balls that have entered the current distribution prize apparatus 64 can be predicted based on the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbol that is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having more fun besides winning the special symbol and to get tired of the game early.

  The status selection table 202k also indicates that the status E which is easily selected in the range of 200 to 255 in which the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e is close to the value at which the first start port 71 is to be won, is also displayed. Even if the value of the number counter 203e is a low value (for example, a value in the range of 0 to 60), it is configured to be selected. Therefore, when the status E is selected, the first start port is provided to the player. It can be expected that the prize will be close to 71.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, in the second embodiment, a first ordinary symbol variation process (S113), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. I do. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the first ordinary symbol variation process (S113). The first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) is a variation display of the first ordinary symbol performed in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83, and the first blade of the first ordinary electric accessory. This is a process for controlling the opening time of 64s1 and the like.

  In the first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a first ordinary symbol hit. (S831). Regarding the hitting of the first ordinary symbol, the opening / closing control of the first blade 64s1 of the ordinary electric accessory is performed after the indication indicating the winning is displayed on the first ordinary symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83. Includes up to the middle. When it is determined that the first normal symbol is hit (S831: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is not hit (S831: No), it is determined whether the first ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in the variable display (S832). If it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S832: Yes), the variation time of the first ordinary symbol executed in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is changed. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (S833). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S848 described later before the fluctuation display is started in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the first ordinary symbol is set with a variation time of 30 seconds for both the hit variation pattern and the off variation pattern.

  In the processing of S833, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S833: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S833 that the fluctuating time of the fluctuating first ordinary symbol has elapsed (S833: Yes), the first ordinary symbol display unit of the second symbol display device 83 The stop display of 83a is set (S834). In the process of S834, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S844, the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the first ordinary symbol (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S847, the “X” symbol is displayed in the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be stopped (lighted). When the stop display is set by the processing of S8034, the variable display in the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop is performed in the display mode set in the processing of S844 and S847. The symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol this time is a win (S835). When it is determined that the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol is a win (S835: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is set (836). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol is out of this time (S835: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S832, when it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is not in the variable display (S832: No), the value of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 (the variable display in the first ordinary symbol is suspended). The number of times M) is obtained (S837).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is larger than 0 (S838). When it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is 0 (S838: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is not 0 (S838: Yes), the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by one. (S839).

  Next, the data stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is shifted (S840). In the process of S840, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first ordinary symbol hold 1 to the first ordinary symbol hold 4 in the first ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b1 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first ordinary symbol hold 1 → execution area, first ordinary symbol hold 2 → first ordinary symbol hold 1, first ordinary symbol hold 3 → first ordinary symbol hold 2, first ordinary symbol hold 4 → The data in each area is shifted, such as the first ordinary symbol hold 3. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball execution area is obtained (S841).

  Based on the hit determination value of the first normal symbol random number table 202c1 (FIG. 42 (c), a win / fail determination result is obtained (S842), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a win (S843). When it is determined that a win has occurred (S843: Yes), a display mode of “当 た り” which is a display mode at the time of a hit displayed on the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is set. (S844) A normal symbol hit variation pattern command (in the present embodiment, there is only one type of normal symbol hit variation pattern command, a command indicating the first normal symbol hit) is set (generated).

  The opening time and the number of times of opening the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 seconds and once, respectively (S846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is out of order (S843: No), the out-of-off-state, which is the out-of-off display mode displayed on the first ordinary symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83, is performed. The display mode of “x” which is the display mode of is set. The fluctuation time of the first ordinary symbol is set to 30 seconds.

  It should be noted that the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) is the same as the first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) in the second ordinary symbol display unit 83b of the second symbol display device 83. The only difference is that the variation display of the symbol and the opening time of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are controlled. Since the same control is executed, illustration and description thereof are omitted. The variation time of the second ordinary symbol is the same as that of the first ordinary symbol, and the same value is set for the opening time and the number of times of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol are configured to be able to simultaneously perform variable display. In addition, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are configured to be able to simultaneously execute the opening control.

  As described above, the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are 0.5 seconds and one time. In this case, the length of one game ball is set to be possible. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls enter the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2 at a time, ball clogging occurs, and an extremely large hit easily occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fluctuation time of the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol is configured to be relatively long as 30 seconds, it takes time until the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol stop changing, and the first ordinary symbol and the first ordinary symbol are changed. The number of lotteries for the second ordinary symbol becomes extremely large, and the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is frequently opened, and the first starting port is extremely increased. It is possible to prevent the player from easily winning the prize.

  Also, since the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 are arranged in series vertically, they pass through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 at the same time. Thus, the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol can easily start to fluctuate in the same period. Therefore, since the variation time of the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol are set to be the same, the determination result is also easily displayed at the same time, and the player can display the variation display result of the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol. You can easily see.

  Referring to FIG. 55, a through gate passage process 2 (S115), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing 2 (S115). In the through gate passage process 2 (S115 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and it is determined that the game ball has passed. In this case, the processing in the case of passing is executed for each of them.

  In the through gate passage process 2 (FIG. 55, S115), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (S921). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (S921: Yes), the value of the first ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S922). It is determined whether the obtained value is less than the upper limit value of 4 (S923). When it is determined that the obtained value is less than 4 (S923: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the obtained first ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c1, and the added value is the first ordinary symbol holding. It is stored in the ball number counter 203c1 (S924). The value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (S921: No), the value of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is 4 or more (that is, 4 which is the upper limit value). ) (S923: No), the process of S926 is executed.

  It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 (S926). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 (S926: Yes), the value of the second ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S927). It is determined whether the obtained value is less than the upper limit value of 4 (S928). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S928: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the acquired second ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c2, and the added value is the second symbol holding. It is stored in the ball number counter 203c2 (S929). The value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2 (S930). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 (S926: No), the value of the second ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 is 4 or more (that is, 4 which is the upper limit value). ) Is determined (S928: No), this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 56, in the second embodiment, the normal entrance processing (S116), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal entrance processing (S116). The normal ball entrance process (S116 in FIG. 56) in the second embodiment is performed when the game ball enters the first normal ball entrance 640s1 and the second normal ball entrance 640s2. By measuring the playing time, it is determined whether the entered game ball is discharged from the sixth discharge port 650a6 to the eighth discharge port 650a8, or whether a time longer than the time for winning the first starting port 71 has elapsed. After that, the processing for correcting the value of the distribution winning prize ball number counter 203e when one game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 or one game ball is guided to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is executed. I do.

  In the normal entrance processing (S116 in FIG. 56), first, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first ordinary entrance 640s1 (S951). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: Yes), the first general power flag 203j1 is set to ON (S952). Thereafter, the first ordinary power timer 203k1 is set to 0 (S953).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: No), it is determined whether the first general power flag 203j1 is on (S954). When it is determined that the first ordinary power flag 203j1 is on (S954: Yes), the value of the first ordinary power timer 203k1 is updated by adding 1 (S955). It is determined whether the updated value exceeds the set value (5 s in the present embodiment) (S956). When it is determined that the updated value exceeds the set value (S956: Yes), the first general power flag 203j1 is set to off (S957). Thereafter, a first distribution correction process is executed (S958). The details of the first distribution correction processing (S958) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. Of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64, a process for correcting the deviation is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first ordinary power flag 203j1 is off (S954: No), when it is determined that the value of the first ordinary power timer 203k1 is equal to or less than the set value (S956: No), The process of S959 is performed. In the process of S959, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: Yes), the second general power flag 203j2 is set to ON (S960). Thereafter, the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is set to 0 (S961).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: No), it is determined whether the second general power flag 203j2 is on (S962). When it is determined that the second ordinary power flag 203j2 is ON (S962: Yes), the value of the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S963). It is determined whether the value of the second general-purpose timer 203k2 exceeds a set value (2s in the present embodiment) (S964). When it is determined that the value of the second ordinary power timer 203k2 exceeds the set value (S964: Yes), the second ordinary power flag 203j2 is set to off (S965). A second distribution correction process is performed (S966). In the second distribution correction processing (S966), the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is changed to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 in the processing of S972 of the first distribution correction processing (FIG. 57, S958). Other processes are the same except for the difference, so that illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, a first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), which is one process of the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. ) Will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first distribution correction processing (S958).

  In the first distribution correction processing (FIG. 57, S958), first, when one game ball is guided to the position of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 corresponding to the current value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. The value of the corresponding sorting prize ball number counter 203e is calculated (S971). Here, it is assumed that, for example, the current value of the distribution prize ball counter 203e is “100”. Since the position data of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 corresponding to the value "100" of the sorting winning ball counter 203e is "100001100", the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 is in the first storage position. The portion 64c6 is in a state of facing upward. In this case, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1 and the game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6, the game ball enters the first accommodation portion 64c6, and the sixth distribution is performed. The rotating member 64a6 rotates leftward to guide the game ball to the sixth guide path 64z12.

  The game ball guided to the sixth guideway 64z12 is guided to the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7. The seventh sorting rotation member 64a7 is located at a position where the second accommodation portion 64d7 faces upward, so that a game ball enters the second accommodation portion 64d7, turns rightward, and moves to the seventh guide path 64z14. Is induced. The game ball guided to the seventh guideway guides the game ball to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. At this time, the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8 is in a state where the second accommodation portion 64d8 is facing upward, so that the game ball enters the second accommodation portion 64d8 and rotates rightward, thereby causing the eighth discharge guide path. The game ball is guided to 64z15, and is discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  Thus, when the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 100, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1, the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 is moved to the second accommodation portion 64d6. Since the seventh distributing rotation member 64a7 is changed to a position where the first accommodating portion c7 and the eighth distributing rotating member 64a8 are directed to the first accommodating portion c8, respectively, the first to eighth distributing members are changed. The position information of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is "10001011", and it is calculated that the position information corresponds to the value 132 of the distribution winning ball counter 203e.

  Next, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e calculated in the process of S971 is updated (S972). The value of the distribution ball count counter 203f is also updated with the same value as the updated prize ball counter value (S973).

  As a result, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1, a deviation occurs between the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is corrected based on the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. The processing can be performed on the basis of this, and the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the misregistration is determined as an illegal prize despite the fact that the first starting port 71 is won in a regular game due to the occurrence of the deviation.

  In addition, since the correction of the value of the distribution ball number counter 203f to the corrected value of the distribution ball number counter 203e is executed, the distribution prize ball number is obtained despite the normal game being played. The difference between the value of the number counter 203e and the value of the sorting / ejection ball number counter 203f is determined as an abnormal setting value (10 in the present embodiment) determined to be abnormal in the sorting error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) described later. It is possible to prevent a problem that is determined as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the correction of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge sphere number counter 203f is performed by calculation, but is not limited thereto. , The respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are detected, and the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e corresponding to the position is calculated. You may comprise so that it may correct. With such a configuration, the value can be corrected to a more accurate value.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 seconds and one time, so that only one ball enters the first ordinary entrance 640s1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a game ball cannot be directly inserted into the first normal entrance 640s1 (for example, in a state in which the first ordinary electric accessory is open, the first ordinary entrance 640s1). And the like, on which the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is open, a recess capable of holding one game ball. Is formed, and when the first blade 64s1 closes (the projection piece regulated by closing is released) in a state where the game ball enters the concave portion, the first normal ball entrance 640s1 enters the concave portion. A configuration may be adopted in which the held game balls enter. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably suppress the problem that a plurality of game balls enter the first normal entrance 640s1 with one opening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory correspond to the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol, respectively. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 may be configured to correspond to one ordinary symbol and to be simultaneously opened. In addition, the configuration may be such that the blades to be opened are changed according to the symbol type of one normal symbol. With this configuration, since the two blades are simultaneously opened, the player can greatly expect that a game ball will enter the first normal entrance 64s1 or the second entrance 64s2. In addition, a game can be played with an expectation of which blade will open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  With reference to FIG. 58, a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1200). The main process (S1200 in FIG. 58) of the second embodiment is different from the main process (S1200 in FIG. 27) of the first embodiment in that a big hit control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is used instead of the big hit control process (S1203). However, instead of the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207), a distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) is added. The processes in S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1202 is completed, a jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot control process 2 (S1220) which is one of the main processes (S1200 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1220). The jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1200) executes a process of opening and closing the variable prize device 65 depending on the state of the jackpot game. A process of setting the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at positions corresponding to the number of entering balls determined by lottery is executed.

  In the big hit control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220), first, it is determined whether a big hit game has started (S1221). If it is determined that the big hit game has started (S1221: Yes), an opening command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the start of the big hit game is set (generated). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game has not been started (S1221: No), it is determined whether the big hit game is being performed (S1223). If it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game (S1223: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that a big hit game is being played (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1224). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1224: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening opening) is opened by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1225). A round number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the newly started round number is set. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1224: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is satisfied (S1227). Here, the closing condition is whether a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the specific winning opening 65a, or whether one of 30 seconds has elapsed since opening. Is set to

  When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1227: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is closed by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1228). Thereafter, this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (S1229: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229). The ending effect is set when a preset number of rounds ends.

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the big hit game is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1230). It is determined whether the executed jackpot type is the jackpot C or the jackpot F (S1231). That is, the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting and winning device 64 after the jackpot game execute a random setting process in which the random setting process is set to a position corresponding to the number of entered balls determined by lottery. It is determined whether there is.

  When it is determined that the executed jackpot type is the jackpot C or the jackpot F (S1231: Yes), a random setting process is executed (S1232). The details of the random setting process (S1232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but the random number setting table 202m (see FIG. 45 (b)) indicates that the first to eighth distribution prize devices 64a1 after the jackpot game have been executed. A process of setting the positions of .about.64a8 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the executed jackpot type is the jackpot D or the jackpot E (S1231: No), the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 60, a random setting process (S1232) which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 (S1220 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the random setting process (S1232).

  In the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232), first, the value of the random counter 203p is obtained (S1241). Based on the obtained value of the random counter 203p, the setting positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined (selected) from the random number setting table 202m (S1242). The positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are set based on the determined set positions (S1243). The values of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution ball counter 203f are set to values corresponding to the determined set positions (S1244).

  In this manner, when the jackpot game is executed, if the jackpot is the jackpot C or the jackpot F, the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64h are determined by lottery after the jackpot game and correspond to the number of entered balls. 64a8 are respectively set. Therefore, the player performs the jackpot game in the expectation that the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are the hits determined by the lottery, and when the hit is the big hit C or the big hit F, It is possible to play a game by expecting that the ball is not set at a set position corresponding to the number of entering balls as large as possible.

  Further, it is difficult for the player to determine how many balls have been set in the sorting prize winning device 64 after the jackpot, so that the number of balls that will be won in the first starting port 71 is slightly reduced. You can play games with the expectation that it will not.

  In this embodiment, even during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 39, the ball is guided by the taper surface 65 s formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device 65 into the ball entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64 and enters the ball. It has an easy configuration. Therefore, since the jackpot C or the jackpot D is a jackpot of five rounds, the jackpot game time is short, and the number of game balls entering the entrance 640 is small. Therefore, in the case of a 5-round jackpot, the player strongly expects the jackpot C to be subjected to the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232). On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot E or the jackpot F which is the jackpot of 16 rounds, a certain amount of game balls enter the entrance 640, so even if it is not the jackpot F, It is possible to reduce the number of required balls until the number of balls that wins the one starting port 71. Therefore, the player can obtain the next big hit at an early stage, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the random number setting table 202m, when the value of the random counter 202p meets 90 to 99, the number of entered balls is set to 255. In this case, the game ball wins the first starting port 71, and a continuous big hit can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can obtain many game balls in a shorter time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60) depending on the type of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to determine whether to execute the random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60). With such a configuration, the player himself / herself can taste the feeling of having performed a lottery, and can increase the pleasure in the jackpot game.

  With reference to FIG. 61, in the second embodiment, a distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320), which is one of the main processes (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing 2 (S1320). In the distribution error process 2 (S1320 in FIG. 61) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1321 to S1322 and S1324 to S1326 are added to the distribution error process of the first embodiment (S1207 in FIG. 28). I have. In each process of S1323, S1327 to S1332 in the second embodiment, the same process as each process of S1301 to S1307 in the first embodiment is executed.

  In the process of S1321, it is determined whether the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1321). When it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1321: Yes), the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q. It is determined whether the position data matches the position data (position information) present (S1322). If it is determined that they match (S1322: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1323). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 do not match the values of the distribution position storage area 203q (S1322: No), S1327 is performed. Is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is off (S1321: No), the processing of S1324 is executed. In the processing of S1324, it is determined whether the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e matches the value of the sorting discharge ball number counter 203f (that is, whether the value difference is 0) (S1324). If it is determined that they match (that is, the difference is 0) (S1324: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1325). Thereafter, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q as position data (position information). This position data is stored in the same manner as the position data of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the random number setting table 202m shown in FIG. Note that the processing of S1327 to S1332 is the same processing as the distribution error processing 2 (S1207 in FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, when it is determined that the game balls are not flowing down into the distribution winning device 64, the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are stored. Until a new game ball enters the distribution prize device 64, the position of the game ball is collated until the game ball does not win the distribution prize device 64. It is possible to monitor whether the eight distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 have rotated. Therefore, fraudulent movement of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 from outside can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first starting port 71 from being illegally won, and it is possible to reduce damage caused by the illegality.

  With reference to FIG. 62, a main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1600). The main processing (S1600 in FIG. 62) of the second embodiment is different from the main processing (S1600 in FIG. 30) of the first embodiment in that the variable display setting processing (FIG. 33, S1611) is replaced with the variable display setting processing 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) replaces the pseudo variation process (FIG. 34, S1612), and pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) replaces the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) and replaces the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 31, S1660) in place of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614). In the processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the second embodiment, the same processes as those in S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the first embodiment are executed. For convenience, the description starts with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed after the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650).

  Referring to FIG. 63, a command determination process 2 (S1660), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1660). The command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (FIG. 63, S1660) is different from the command determination process of the first embodiment (FIG. 31, S1614) in that each process of S1727 to S1730 is performed instead of each process of S1707 to S1712. Has been added. In each process from S1721 to S1726 and S1731 to S1735 in the second embodiment, the same processes as those in S1701 to S1706 and S1713 to S1717 in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1724, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1724; No), the process of S1727 is executed. In the process of S1727, it is determined whether or not the winning pattern command of the ordinary symbol output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1727). When it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command has been received (S1727: Yes), the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S1728).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command has not been received (S1727: No), it is determined whether the status command output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1729). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1729: Yes), the status type is extracted from the received status command and stored in the slave status storage area 223h (S1730). On the other hand, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1729: No), the process of S1731 is executed. Note that the processes from S1731 to S1735 are the same processes as the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. I do. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1630). The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) of the second embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (S1611 of FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment in that steps S1923 to S1907 are performed instead of steps S1903 to S1907. Each process has been added. In each process from S1921 to S1922 and S1929 to S1935 in the second embodiment, the same processes as those in S1901 to S1902 and S1908 to S1912 in the first embodiment are executed.

  When the processing in S1922 is performed, the processing in S1923 is performed. In the processing of S1923, it is determined whether any of the precursor A to precursor C pseudo-variation patterns is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable display (dynamic display) (S1923). If it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo fluctuation patterns is not displayed for fluctuation (S1923: No), the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1723 of the command determination process 2 (S1660 in FIG. 63) is obtained. Is performed (S1924). The variation pattern selected at this time is a variation display mode in which a special symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 11A is executed. Detailed contents are the same as those already described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo variation patterns is displayed in a variable manner (S1923: Yes), the type of the precursor pseudo variation pattern displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 is It is determined what it is (S1925). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation manner is the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous A fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1926).

  Here, the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous A fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol A fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same numbers in the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” voice is output from the voice output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left, and an image of the hero climbing toward the high mountain is displayed (the upper diagram in FIG. 46). Thereafter, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as it is as the special symbol, and the hero is replaced. The image that has reached the top of the mountain is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (a), the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message "Arriving in heaven!" Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation display of the switching A fluctuation pattern is not started even after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the main character does not reach the top of the mountain and the pseudo pattern different from the left and right pseudo patterns is used. The middle symbol stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed as the fluctuation is the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous B fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1927).

  Here, the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous B fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol B fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same numbers in the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” voice is output from the voice output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, the hero is displayed, and an image in which the hero jumps toward the sky is displayed. Thereafter, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous B variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is replaced as it is as the special symbol, and the hero is replaced with the special symbol. The image that reaches the top of the cloud is displayed. Then, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (b), the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message “Arriving in the heavens!” Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, when the fluctuation display of the switching b fluctuation pattern does not start even after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the middle symbol is a pseudo symbol different from the left and right pseudo symbols while the main character does not reach above the cloud. Stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation manner is the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous C fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1928).

  Here, the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous C fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol C fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (the numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same numbers in the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” voice is output from the voice output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed to the upper left, an image of the closed door is displayed, and an image in which the closed door repeatedly opens and closes slightly is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins in the first opening 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed at the upper left is replaced as it is as the special symbol and closed. The image with the door open is displayed. Then, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 47, the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the character “Arrival at heaven!” Is displayed below it. Is done. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern, when the fluctuation display of the switching C fluctuation pattern is not started even after the fluctuation time elapses, a pseudo pattern different from the left and right pseudo symbols is left without opening the closed door. The middle symbol stops at the symbol, and the variable display ends.

  Note that the processes from S1929 to S1935 are the same as the processes already described in the variable display setting process (S1611 in FIG. 33) of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a pseudo variation process 2 (S1640), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (S1640).

  In the pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variation on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S2021). If it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S2021: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2021: No), it is determined whether the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022). When it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the pseudo symbol is being displayed (S2023). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being fluctuated (S2023: Yes), the interruption normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, and the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to off (S2024).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. The pseudo symbol being displayed is reduced and displayed below the third symbol display device 81, and is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The character "Emergency News Shortcut!" Is displayed above the pseudo symbol, and the first ordinary electric accessory is displayed. Of the first blade 64s1 or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened, and the game ball enters the first ordinary ball entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary ball entrance 640s2. Will be notified.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped and displayed (S2023: No), the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, and the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to off (S2025).

  Here, the ordinary pseudo fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the character "Attack Chance" is displayed, and the character "Aim for the right chucker!" The first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened to allow a game ball to enter the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2. Notify that it will be in a state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is off (S2022: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2026). Here, the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol includes the fluctuating display of the interrupted normal pseudo fluctuating pattern and the normal normal pseudo fluctuating pattern. When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S2026: Yes), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2026: No), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2027). Based on the obtained value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the slave status storage area 223h, the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is selected from the pseudo fluctuation table 222a (see FIG. 44B). Is performed (S2028). Based on the selected (set) pseudo fluctuation pattern, a display pseudo fluctuation pattern command is set (generated).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44B, the pseudo fluctuation table 222a is set so that the selection ratio is different for the fluctuation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol corresponding to the status type. Specifically, the status E is configured such that the precursor C pseudo variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a, and the status D, the status C, the status B, and the status A are sequentially arranged in this order. The setting is made so that the selection ratio becomes lower for the precursor C pseudo variation pattern. Further, for the precursor B fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected in the case of the status C is set to be high, and for the precursor A fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected in the case of the status B is configured to be high. ing.

  Further, since each status is set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 so that the ratio selected by the value in the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e is different, the status depends on the selection frequency of the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol. It is configured to be able to predict the number of game balls that have won the current distribution prize device 64.

  Therefore, the more skilled the game is, the more the number of game balls that have won the distribution prize winning device 64 can be predicted from the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol. Therefore, not only the special symbol jackpot but also the fun of prediction can be obtained, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. In addition, as the game is performed, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be determined, and the player can play the game for a longer time.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning pattern of a normal symbol is received, a predetermined notification mode is configured to be displayed in a pseudo symbol state in a pseudo symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If a pseudo symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner when the hit fluctuation pattern is received, the pseudo symbol is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, an opportunity such as 341) to provide a normal symbol to the player. May be notified. With such a configuration, the player can be more interested in the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol.

  Next, the background selection process 2 (S1650), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the background selection process 2 (S1650).

In the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650), first, the value of the background change counter 223j is obtained (S2121). It is determined whether the acquired value of the background change counter 223j is greater than 50, that is, is greater than or equal to 51 (S2122). When it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is equal to or greater than 51 (S2122: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is obtained (S2123). A background pattern (background image type) is selected (determined) from the background selection table 222b based on the acquired pseudo variation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the slave status storage area 223h (S2124). . A display background command based on the selected background pattern is set (generated). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is equal to or less than 50 (S2122: No), the process ends.

  As described above, since whether or not to change the background image is determined by lottery, the background image can be changed at random. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing in the game.

  In addition, since the background pattern is set so that the selection ratio is different based on the status type, depending on the frequency of the displayed background pattern, a player who enters the current sorting winning award device 64 The number can be predicted.

  In the status E in which the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e is easy to be selected with a large value, the status E is also selected when the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e is relatively small (for example, 10 or the like). In fact, even if the number of the game balls that have won the sorting prize winning device 64 is small, the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71 is expected to be reached shortly with expectation. A game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game before the number of game balls that will win the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls entering the entrance 640 is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine 10 may be provided so as to output the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 outside the pachinko machine 10. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the current number of game balls that have won the distribution prize winning device 64 to the player at the judgment of the game store. Therefore, by informing the game store of information that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to bring more players to the store.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing game balls to a first flow path and a second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; A second passage switching means for alternately distributing the game ball to the fourth passage, and a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the fourth passage allocated to the second passage switching means can enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, a winning / failing determination means for performing a winning / falling determination of a game, and a bonus game is given to the player based on the winning / failing determination result obtained by the winning / falling determination means. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a bonus game executing means to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching member are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, a hit determination is executed by the hit determination means. The bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the ball entrance every predetermined number, and the player can determine which ball of the game ball has been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It is possible to enjoy the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, there is a game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, and the game ball distribution means is capable of distributing game balls. A ball entrance, a guide path for guiding game balls entering from the entrance to the first flow path switching means, and discharging game balls distributed to the first flow path by the first flow path switching means. A gaming machine A2, comprising: a first discharge port for discharging game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, in the game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game ball which has entered the distribution ball opening through which the game ball can enter is placed in the first flow path. It is guided to the switching means by a guide path. Game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means are discharged from the first discharge port. Further, the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means are discharged from the second discharge port. Thereby, the player can easily distribute the game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path that does not enter the ball entrance due to the discharge of the game ball through the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the progress of the game without concentrating on whether or not the player has entered the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, to the special entrance where the hit judgment is executed by the hit judgment unit based on the entrance of a game ball different from the entrance and to the special entrance in the normal gaming state. Entry of game balls is set to be difficult, and in a special game state different from the normal game state, entry of game balls into the special entrance is set more easily than in the normal game state. Means, a bonus game type determining means for determining a normal bonus game for setting the gaming state after the bonus game to the normal gaming state and a special bonus game for setting the gaming state after the bonus game to the special gaming state; The gaming machine A3, wherein the special entrance in the special game state is configured such that game balls can enter the entrance more easily than the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 or A2. That is, when a game ball enters a special entrance that is different from the entrance, a hit determination is performed by the hit determination unit. In the normal game state, it is set to be difficult to enter the game ball into the special entrance, and in the special game state different from the normal game state, the entry of the game ball into the special entrance is more than in the normal game state. It is easily set by the entry control means. The special bonus game for setting the game state after the bonus game to the normal game state and the special bonus game for setting the game state after the bonus game to the special game state are determined by the bonus game type determination means. In the special game state, the special entrance is configured to allow game balls to enter the ball more easily than the entrance. Therefore, in the normal game state, a predetermined number of game balls enter the entrance and the hit / fail judgment is performed. However, in the special game state, the game balls enter the special entrance more easily than in the special game state. Since the ball can be played, an efficient game can be provided. Therefore, the player can play different games between the normal game state and the special game state, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit may be configured such that the first storage unit capable of receiving a game ball and the first storage unit capable of receiving a game ball A different second accommodating section, the first accommodating section and the second accommodating section are provided, and the second accommodating section is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the second accommodating section or the fourth accommodating section is rotated. The game ball is distributed to the first accommodation unit and rotated to a first position at which the game ball can be received. At the first position, the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first accommodation unit, and the Turning means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and turning the game balls to a second position at which the game balls can be received in the second accommodating portion; and a game at the first position or the second position. Before receiving the ball into the first or second receiving section, the ball is moved from the first position to the first or second receiving section. Position or gaming machine the pivot means from the second position to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. The game device is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is turned to a second position at which the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  Initial control means for executing either one of an initialization control process for initializing the gaming machine when the gaming machine is powered on and an initial control process for setting the gaming machine to a state immediately before the power is turned off; After the control process or the initial control process is executed, a normal control means for executing a normal control process for executing a normal game is provided. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the road, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path. A second flow path switching means, a ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, and a game ball entering the entrance port; Determination means for performing a determination as to whether or not a game is based on A bonus game executing means for granting a bonus game to a player based on a winning result, and at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means in the initialization control processing. A game machine B1 comprising: initial switching setting means for setting a state in which game balls can be distributed to a predetermined flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are obtained. That is, one of an initialization control process for initializing the gaming machine when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and an initial control process for setting the gaming machine to a state immediately before the power is turned off is executed by the initial control means. After the initialization control process and the initial control process are performed, the normal control process for performing a normal game is performed by the normal control unit. Game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, a hit determination is executed by the hit determination means. The bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. By the initialization control process, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set by the initial switching setting means to a state in which game balls can be distributed to a predetermined flow path. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the ball entrance every predetermined number, and the player can determine which ball of the game ball has been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It is possible to enjoy the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Also, when the gaming machine is initialized, the flow path through which the game balls are distributed is set so as to be a predetermined flow path, so from the initial state until the game balls enter the entrance port. Can be set to a certain number or more. Therefore, by setting the initial state, it is possible to reduce the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of each gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from a first storage part capable of receiving game balls and a second storage part different from the first storage part capable of receiving game balls. And the first storage section and the second storage section are provided, and are rotated by receiving game balls in the second storage section, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. Then, the first storage portion is rotated to a first position capable of receiving a game ball, and the first position is rotated by receiving a game ball in the first storage portion, thereby rotating the first passage or the first passage. Turning means for distributing the game balls to the three flow paths and turning the game balls to a second position capable of receiving the game balls in the second accommodating portion; and, in the first position or the second position, the game balls in the first position or the second position. The second position or the second position from the first position before receiving in the receiving portion or the second receiving portion The rotation means to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting from the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. By rotating by receiving the game ball, the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is rotated to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodation portion by the rotation means. It is turned. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  In the gaming machine B2, the initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means at the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position by the initial switching setting means. The number of gaming balls required to be distributed to the flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means and to enter the ball entrance can be set to the maximum. Therefore, by initializing the gaming machines, the settings between the gaming machines can be made equal, the ball can be made to enter the entrance at an early stage, and the jackpot is given early, thereby causing damage to the game store. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, an initial value for determining whether to set the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means to the first position or the second position, respectively. A switching position determining unit, wherein the initial switching setting unit sets the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit based on the setting determined by the initial switching position determining unit; A gaming machine B4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, the initial switching position determining means determines which of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means is set to the first position or the second position. The first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively set by the initial switching setting means based on the settings determined by the initial switching position determining means. With this, when the gaming machine is initialized, the setting with the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means is randomly set each time in each gaming machine. The setting of the first flow path switching means or the setting of the second flow path switching means can be easily changed. Therefore, the player can select a gaming machine having a pleasure of selecting a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player from among the plurality of gaming machines, even if the gaming machine has been initialized. Therefore, the pleasure of playing a game can be increased.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing game balls to a first flow path and a second flow path; and a third flow path for distributing game balls to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A second passage switching means for alternately distributing the game flow to the fourth passage and a fourth passage, and a ball entrance through which game balls flowing down the fourth passage allocated to the second passage switching means can enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, a winning / failing determination means for performing a determination of success / failure of a game, and a bonus game is given to the player based on the hit / failure determination result obtained by the hit / fail determination means. The bonus game executing means to be provided, and after the bonus game, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set to a state in which the game ball is distributed to which flow path. And a flow path determining means for determining whether to perform the game. 1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, a hit determination is executed by the hit determination means. The bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the ball entrance every predetermined number, and the player can determine which ball of the game ball has been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It is possible to enjoy the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Also, after the end of the privilege game, the flow path is determined to which of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means the game ball is set to be allocated to which flow path. Determined by means. Thus, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly before the game ball enters the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. Can be expected. Therefore, more fun can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided in a first housing portion capable of receiving game balls and a second housing different from the first storage portion capable of receiving game balls. Part, the first accommodating part and the second accommodating part are provided, and the game ball is rotated by receiving a game ball in the second accommodating part, and a game ball is inserted into the second channel or the fourth channel. Distribute and rotate to a first position where game balls can be received in the first storage section, and rotate by receiving game balls in the first storage section at the first position to rotate the first flow path or Turning means for distributing the game balls to the third flow path and turning the game balls to a second position at which the game balls can be received in the second accommodating portion; Before receiving in the first storage section or the second storage section, the second position or the second position Gaming machine C2, wherein said rotating means to the first position from the position in which having a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. The game device is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is turned to a second position at which the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  In the gaming machine C2, the flow path determination means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to either the first position or the second position based on a predetermined lottery. The rotation means is configured to autonomously rotate the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means respectively to the position determined by the flow path determination means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, based on the predetermined lottery, the flow path determination means determines which of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set to the first position or the second position. In the rotation means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively rotated by the rotation means to the positions determined by the flow path determination means. This makes it possible to easily set the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit after the bonus game. Therefore, the processing at the time of ending the privilege game can be reduced, and the time from execution of the privilege game to execution of the normal game can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means correspond to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means until a game ball enters the entrance opening. The apparatus has a setting table in which settings with the second flow path switching means are respectively stored, and the flow path determination means is required to enter a game ball into the entrance based on the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means is determined, and the settings of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set from the setting table based on the number of game balls. A gaming machine C4 that is determined individually.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4. That is, the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means are set in accordance with the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for causing the game balls to enter the ball entrance. Are stored in the setting table. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for causing the game balls to enter the entrance is determined, and the first flow path switching means and The setting with the second flow path switching means is respectively determined by the flow path determination means. This makes it possible to easily set the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member in accordance with the number of game balls required to allow game balls to enter the ball entrance. Therefore, the control load after execution of the bonus game can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or the game information relating to the game; and Game machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for giving a bonus to a player, comprising a sorting prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize means comprises A sorting ball entrance through which game balls can enter the distribution prize means, and game balls entering the sorting ball entrance are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. First flow path switching means, and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the two flow paths to a third flow path and a fourth flow path for guiding the game ball to the entrance; Counting means for counting the number of game balls, and game information determining means for determining the game information to be displayed on the display means based on a count value of the counting means for sorting winning. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit as identification information or game information relating to the game. When the identification information indicating that the result of the determination is a hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game for giving the privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means alternately flow into the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. It is sorted by the road switching means. The number of game balls in the distribution prize means is counted by the distribution prize counting means. Game information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the game information determination means based on the count value of the distribution winning in-counter. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Also, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the distribution prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening, so the player must enter the entrance entrance It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the sorting prize winning means, thereby providing more game enjoyment. Further, since the game information displayed on the display means is determined by the number of game balls entering the sorting prize means, the game information is displayed at a random opportunity, and the player Can be prevented from becoming boring.

  In the gaming machine D1, the number-of-balls counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the sorting ball entrance, and the game information determining means, wherein the count value of the counting means within the sorting prize is a predetermined count value. A game machine D2 characterized in that the game machine D2 determines one of the game information out of a plurality of different types of game information based on the count value of the number-of-incidence counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. In other words, the number of game balls that have entered the sorting entrance is counted by the entering ball count means. The game information is determined based on the count value of the inside of the sorting winning a prize based on the count value of the inside of the sorting winning a prize, when the count value of the sorting inside winning a prize is a predetermined count value, the game information of a plurality of different types of game information is determined. Determined by means. As a result, the game information is determined based on the count value of the counting means within the sorting prize, so that information on the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize means is notified to the player based on the determined game information. Can be. Therefore, the player determines the number of game balls to be entered into the sorting prize means required before entering the entrance opening from the information on the number of game balls which have won the sorting prize means from the game information. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is information relating to background information on which the identification information is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the game information is constituted by the information on the background information of the display means on which the identification information is displayed. The game information can be confirmed even when the game is running, and the information about the game can be obtained.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are configured such that a first accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball and a first accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball are: A different second accommodating section, the first accommodating section and the second accommodating section are provided, and the second accommodating section is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the second accommodating section or the fourth accommodating section is rotated. The game ball is distributed to the first accommodation unit and rotated to a first position at which the game ball can be received. At the first position, the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first accommodation unit, and the Turning means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and turning the game balls to a second position at which the game balls can be received in the second accommodating portion; and a game at the first position or the second position. Before the ball is received in the first receiving section or the second receiving section, Gaming machine and said second said rotating means and position or from the second position to the first position are those having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. The game device is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is turned to a second position at which the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion. To rotate. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or the game information relating to the game; and Game machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for giving a bonus to a player, comprising a sorting prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize means comprises A sorting ball entrance through which game balls can enter the distribution prize means, and game balls entering the sorting ball entrance are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. First flow path switching means, and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means for alternately distributing game balls distributed to the two flow paths to a third flow path and a fourth flow path for guiding the game ball to the entrance, and the distribution entrance opening; In response to establishment of a condition for starting dynamic display of pseudo-identification information, which is one of the game information, based on the number-of-balls counting means for updating the count value based on the fact that a game ball has Pseudo dynamic display mode determining means for determining one pseudo dynamic display mode among the dynamic display modes of the plurality of pseudo identification information based on the count value of the number of filled ball count means. A gaming machine E1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine E1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit as identification information or game information relating to the game. When the identification information indicating that the result of the determination is a hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game for giving the privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance opening, the first game ball in which the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance for allowing the game ball to enter the sorting winning prize is guided out of the sorting winning prize means. The first and second channels are alternately distributed to the channel and the second channel. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means is guided to the third flow path which is guided outside the distribution winning means and the fourth flow path which is guided to the entrance. The flow is alternately distributed to the flow path by the second flow path switching unit. The count value is updated by the number-of-balls counting means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the sorting ball entrance. When a condition for starting dynamic display of pseudo identification information, which is one of the game information, is met, one of a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo identification information is displayed based on the count value of the number-of-balls counting means. The pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo dynamic display mode determining means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Also, based on the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning means, a dynamic display mode of pseudo identification information, which is one of game information, is determined and dynamically displayed. Thus, the player can determine the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, even when the game ball does not enter the entrance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means sets the pseudo-dynamic display mode as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information when a game ball enters the distribution entrance. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being determined.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo dynamic display mode determining means as a condition for starting the dynamic display in the pseudo identification information that a game ball has entered the distribution entrance, Since the dynamic display is started in the pseudo dynamic display mode at the timing when the game ball enters the distribution winning means, the timing of the dynamic display in the pseudo dynamic display mode can be easily recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize at what timing the pseudo dynamic display mode is based on the ball that has entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately recognize the number of gaming balls that have entered the distribution prize means than in the pseudo dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means, when a game ball enters the entrance and the display is performed on the identification information, A game machine E3 comprising: display switching means for switching the pseudo dynamic display mode to the display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a state where the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means, when a game ball enters the entrance and the display is executed in the identification information, the pseudo dynamic display mode is identified. The display is switched by the display switching means to display information. Therefore, even when the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the display is switched to the display of the identification information, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the display of the identification information.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a dynamic identification display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information to one of a plurality of dynamic identification display modes, When the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode determining means determines a dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the pseudo dynamic display mode being dynamically displayed, 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein when the pseudo dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display mode, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode is determined when the pseudo dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display mode. A gaming machine E4 according to any one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved. That is, one of the plurality of dynamic identification display modes of the identification information is dynamically determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. On the other hand, when the pseudo dynamic display mode is the non-dynamic display, the dedicated dynamic identification display mode when the pseudo dynamic display mode is the non-dynamic display is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. You. As a result, the dynamic identification display mode is determined in accordance with the pseudo-dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed, so that the player feels unnaturally switching from the pseudo-dynamic display mode to the dynamic identification display mode. Can be prevented. Accordingly, the player can identify the content of the pseudo dynamic display mode as a dynamic display that is linked to the dynamic identification display mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the pseudo dynamic display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. The sorting prize means has a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter in the sorting prize means, and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port in the first channel. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means alternately movable between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to the second flow path, and the second flow path is provided by the first flow path switching means. A third position for distributing the game balls distributed to the road to the third flow path, and a fourth position for guiding the game balls to the entrance. A second flow path switching means having a second distribution movable means alternately movable to a fourth position for distribution to the road; and a position determining means for at least determining the position of the second distribution movable means. When a game ball enters the entrance, based on the position of the second distribution movable unit determined by the position determination unit, a position monitoring unit that determines whether the position is a normal position. A gaming machine F1 comprising: an abnormality processing execution unit that executes an abnormality process when the position monitoring unit determines that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the gaming machine F1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding a game ball to a ball entrance, a first position at which a game ball having entered a sorting ball inlet through which a game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to a first flow path. And a second position which is alternately moved to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by a second flow path switching unit having a second distribution moving unit that moves alternately. The position of the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether the position is a normal position based on the position of the second position movable means determined by the position determination means. Then, when the position monitoring means determines that there is an abnormality, the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing executing means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Further, when a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined based on the position of the second distribution movable means whether or not the ball is abnormally entered, so that illegal entry can be suppressed. Therefore, damage caused by illegally entering the entrance can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters the entrance, if a game ball enters the distribution entrance later than the entered game ball, then, The position monitoring means includes a subsequent position determining means for determining that the entered game ball has moved the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means. A gaming machine F2, which determines whether or not it is in a normal position based on the result of the determination by the subsequent position determining means when the ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance, if a game ball enters the distribution entrance after the entered game ball, the game ball entered thereafter Has moved the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means by the subsequent position determination means. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position discriminating means determines whether the position is a normal position based on the result of the discrimination by the subsequent position discriminating means. Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance, it is possible to more accurately determine whether the ball entered the entrance due to a normal game. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the game ball; a hit determination unit for executing a hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition; and A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. And the sorting prize means comprises: a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; And a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the flow to a fourth flow path that guides the game. And a game ball whose count value is to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. If the value indicates that the game ball has reached the count value, the measuring means for measuring the time since the game ball passed through the sorting entrance, and the game ball entered the entrance In the case, it is determined whether or not the measurement time of the measurement means is within the valid time, and if the measurement time is outside the validity period, the abnormal ball monitoring means for performing an abnormal process for the abnormal ball is provided. A gaming machine G1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. The count value is updated by the number-of-balls counting means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the sorting ball entrance. When the count value is a value indicating that a game ball to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered, the game ball having the count value is distributed. The time after passing through the ball opening is measured by the measuring means. When a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined whether or not the measurement time of the measuring means is within the valid time. Performed by means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Also, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance, if it is determined that the ball has entered outside the valid time, abnormal processing will be executed as abnormal entry, so that entry into the entrance due to fraud Can reduce the damage caused by

  In the gaming machine G1, the abnormally entering ball monitoring means, if the game ball does not enter the entrance port even if the measuring time of the measuring means has passed the validity period, the abnormal entering ball A gaming machine G2 for executing processing.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, if the game ball does not enter the entrance even after the validity period of the time measured by the measuring unit has elapsed, the abnormal entry monitoring unit executes abnormal processing for the abnormal entry. By this, if it is determined that the game ball that will enter the entrance to the entrance ball has entered the distribution entrance, if it is not determined that it entered even after the expiration of the validity period, Since the abnormal processing is executed, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has been thrown into the sorting prize winning means due to improper operation, or that a ball is clogged in the sorting prize winning means due to a malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to detect and improve the damage caused by the fraud and the disadvantage of the player due to the malfunction at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the abnormal ball monitoring means includes a value indicating that a game ball having the count value to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered the ball. The game machine G3 is characterized in that when a game ball enters the entrance while the measuring means is not timing, the abnormality processing for the abnormal entry is executed. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the count value of the number-of-balls counting means is not determined by the second flow path switching means to be a value indicating that a game ball to be distributed to the fourth flow path has entered the ball, and the measuring means is not determined. When a game ball enters the entrance when the timer is in a timing mode, abnormal processing for abnormal entry is executed by the abnormal entry monitoring means. Thereby, even if the ball is entered when the conditions for entering the entrance are not the same, it is processed as an abnormally entered ball, so that irregularities, defects, and the like can be found at an early stage. Therefore, a game can be played normally by detecting an injustice that is illegally detected as an incoming ball by radio waves or the like or a defect due to a clogged ball, etc. at an early stage.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. And the sorting prize means comprises: a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching unit for alternately distributing the game balls to the second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; And a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the flow to a fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and Based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger, the number of incoming balls counting means for counting the number of game balls, the number of discharged balls counting means for counting the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path, A comparing means for comparing the count value of the incoming ball number counting means with the count value of the ejected ball number counting means, and when the comparison result by the comparing means is determined to have a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined abnormal number; A game machine H1 characterized by having abnormal ball monitoring means for executing an abnormal process as an abnormal ball.

  According to the gaming machine H1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. The number of game balls that have entered the sorting entrance is counted by the entering ball count means. Further, the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path is counted by the discharged ball number counting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined opportunity, the count value of the number of incoming balls counting means and the count value of the number of discharged balls counting means are compared by the comparing means. When it is determined that the comparison result by the comparison means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of abnormalities, the abnormal processing as an abnormal ball is executed by the abnormal ball monitoring means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Further, since the difference between the game ball that has entered the sorting prize means and the game ball that has been ejected is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, it is determined whether the ball has been illegally entered into the sorting prize means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such as a game ball being illegally entered into the distribution prize means from other than the distribution ball entrance. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. And the sorting prize means comprises: a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching unit for alternately distributing the game balls to the second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; And a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the flow to a fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and The number of entered balls is added based on the fact that the game ball has been guided from the first channel or the third channel, and is subtracted from the number of entered balls. A counting means for counting the number of game balls that are balling, and an abnormal ball entry when the count value of the counting means for counting the ball is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined abnormal number or less than a normal number. A gaming machine H2, comprising: an abnormal entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. The number of incoming balls is added based on the incoming ball at the sorting inlet, and the number of incoming balls is subtracted from the number of incoming balls based on the fact that a game ball has been guided from the first channel or the third channel. The number of gaming balls entering the pay-in prize means is counted by the counting means during the entry. When it is determined that the count value of the in-ball entry counting means is equal to or greater than the predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number, the abnormal-incidence monitoring means executes the abnormal processing as an abnormal ball entry. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. In addition, game balls in the ball are counted in the sorting prize means, and it is determined whether or not the ball is illegally entered in the sorting prize means by determining that the count value is equal to or more than the abnormal number or less than the normal number. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such as a game ball being illegally entered into the distribution prize means from other than the distribution ball entrance. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the game ball; a hit determination unit for executing a hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition; and A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination, in a gaming machine having a winning prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The sorting prize means includes: a sorting ball port that allows game balls to enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball that has entered the sorting ball port in the first channel. A first flow path switching means having first distribution moving means alternately movable between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to the second flow path; The third position where game balls distributed to the flow path are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path And a second flow path switching means having a second flow path moving means which alternately moves between the first distribution moving means and the second distribution moving means. Position discriminating means, a sorting ball discriminating means for discriminating whether a game ball has entered the sorting prize means, and a game ball in the sorting prize means by the sorting ball discriminating means. In a state where it is determined that the ball has not entered, the position determined by the position determination unit is determined to be an abnormal operation when at least one of the first distribution movable unit and the second distribution movable unit is changed in position. A game comprising: an abnormal operation determining unit that determines based on information; and an abnormal processing executing unit that executes an abnormal process when the abnormal operation determining unit determines that the abnormal operation is performed. Machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means. Position information indicating the positions of the first distribution movable unit and the second distribution movable unit is determined by the position determination unit. During the state in which no game ball has been entered in the sorting prize means by the sorting ball determination means for determining whether a game ball has been entered in the sorting prize means, the first sorting is performed. Abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means based on the position information determined by the position determining means, with the fact that at least one of the movable means and the second distribution movable means has changed in position. When the abnormal operation is determined by the abnormality determining means, the abnormal processing is executed by the abnormal processing executing means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, when the position of at least one of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means is changed in a state in which no game ball has entered the distribution prize means, abnormal processing is performed as abnormal operation. Since the execution is executed, the fraudulent operation of the distribution prize means to fraudulently causing the game ball to enter the entrance can be suppressed. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from a first storage part capable of receiving game balls and a second storage part different from the first storage part capable of receiving game balls. And the first storage section and the second storage section are provided, and are rotated by receiving game balls in the second storage section, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. Then, the game ball is rotated to the first position or the third position at which the game ball can be received in the first storage portion, and the game ball is received by the first storage portion at the first position or the third position. Rotating means for moving the game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and turning the game ball to the second position or the fourth position at which the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion; In the first position or the second position, the game ball is moved to the first accommodation portion or the second position. A first rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotation means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before being received by the container; At the position or the fourth position, the turning means from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. And a second rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Moving the received game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first position or the third position capable of receiving the game ball in the first accommodation portion and the first position or the third position. In this position, the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first storage portion, the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is turned by the turning means to the second position or the fourth position. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion. Is restricted by the first rotation restricting means. In addition, in the third position or the fourth position, the rotating means rotates from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion. Is restricted by the second rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate between the first position and the second position or between the third position and the fourth position, so that the game balls are reliably swung alternately. Can be divided. In addition, the rotation from the first position to the second position or the second position to the first position, the rotation from the third position to the fourth position, or the fourth position to the third position is performed when the game ball is moved to the first storage portion or the second storage position. When the ball has not entered the section, the ball is regulated, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from being continuously received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the game ball; a hit determination unit for executing a hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition; and A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which a bonus is granted to a player based on the result of the success / failure determination being a win, and an open state in which the gaming ball can be guided inside and a gaming ball guided inside. A movable piece movable to a closed state that makes it difficult to perform, and a determination condition for determining whether to change the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the entering or passing of the game ball. A specific entrance that is determined to be established, and a lottery determination unit that performs a lottery that varies the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a hit by the lottery determination unit. If judged A moving means for moving the movable piece from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time, comprising: a distribution prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance; The distribution prize means includes: a distribution ball entrance through which game balls can enter into the distribution prize means; and a game ball having entered the distribution ball entrance into the first flow path and the second flow path. A first flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls, and a second flow for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the first flow path switching means. Path switching means, and an introduction guideway for guiding a game ball to at least one of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means from outside the distribution prize means, The movable piece closes the guide port in the closed state and plays in the open state in the guide port communicating with the outside of the sorting prize winning means. Gaming machine J1, wherein those that are configured provided to direct the ball into the introduction guide path game balls.

  According to the gaming machine J1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. The determination condition for determining whether to change the movable piece movable between the open state in which the game ball can be guided and the closed state in which the game ball cannot be easily guided is based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entrance. The lottery is executed by the lottery judging means based on the establishment of the judgment condition. When the lottery result is determined to be a hit, the movable piece is moved from the closed state to the open state by the movable means for a predetermined time. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game sphere which has entered the sorting entrance where the game sphere can enter in the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. A game ball is guided to the at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means from the outside of the distribution prize winning means by the introduction guiding path. A movable piece provided in the guideway of the introduction guideway closes the guideway in the closed state, and guides the game ball to the guideway in the open state. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, since the movable ball is opened to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, a game ball can be guided from the outside of the sorting prize winning means. By entering the game ball directly without passing through the ball opening, the freshness can be felt. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which a variable prize device that awards a player a bonus game ball based on the fact that the result of the determination is a hit, A distribution prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the distribution prize means includes a distribution ball entrance through which a game ball can enter the distribution prize means, and the distribution A first flow path switching means having a first distribution movable means alternately movable between a first position for distributing a game ball entering a ball opening to a first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to a second flow path; And the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A second flow path switching means having second distribution moving means alternately movable between a third position for distributing to a road and a fourth position for distributing to a fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The variable prize device and the distribution prize means are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball opening when a game ball enters the variable prize device. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit being a hit, a bonus game that enables the variable winning device that gives the player a bonus game ball to execute a game ball is executed by the bonus game execution unit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means. The variable prize device and the sorting prize means are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball opening when game balls are entered into the variable prize device. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. In addition, during the award game, it is possible to enter the sorting ball entrance, so during the award game, by entering the ball into the sorting prize means, it is possible to enter the ball entry port after the award game. The required number of entering balls can be reduced, and a state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Therefore, the player can be motivated to make many game balls enter not only the variable prize device but also the sorting prize means during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game includes at least a special privilege game in which the variable prize means has a longer open time and a normal privilege game in which the variable prize means has a shorter open time than the special privilege game. A gaming machine K2 comprising privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game based on the result of the determination by the means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1. That is, in the privilege game, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is long and a normal privilege game in which the variable prize means has a shorter opening time than the special privilege game are set. Based on the result being a hit, the type of the bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means. As a result, when the special privilege game is determined, not only the opening time of the variable prize device is extended but also an opportunity to allow more game balls to enter the distribution prize means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more benefits for the types of privilege games.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable winning device has a rotating door rotatably supported on the front side of the gaming machine, and in a normal state, the variable winning device is in a state where the rotating door stands up. The gaming ball is restricted from entering the inside, and during the bonus game execution, the turning door turns to the front side of the gaming machine and receives the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the turning door, A gaming machine K3 configured to be guided to the inside of the variable winning device and to the sorting ball entrance.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, the variable winning device is provided with a rotatable door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In normal times, the upright turning door restricts the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning device. At the time of execution of the bonus game, the game ball received on the upper surface of the turn door is guided to the inside of the variable prize device and the sorting ball opening by turning the turn door to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, more game balls can be made to enter the distribution prize means during the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game even after the privilege game, and to allow the player to play the game for a longer time.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 Sorting prize winning device (sorting prize winning means)
64a7 Seventh distribution rotation member (first flow path switching means)
64a8 Eighth distribution rotation member (second flow path switching means)
65 Variable winning device (variable winning device)
71 1st starting port (ball entrance)
201 MPU (acceptance determination means)
640a Entrance entrance (distribution entrance)
S103 (Privilege game execution means)
S208 (Privilege game type determination means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol that informs the lottery result is displayed on the display device. Has been proposed to be implemented in.

JP 2003-305209 A

However, in such a game machine, a game is monotonous next player there has been a problem arises in that tired of the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine such as the one described above, which can suppress a problem that a player gets tired of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path does not flow, Adjusting means for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball based on the operation of the player so that the game ball flows down to one of the flow path and the second flow path; Setting means capable of setting a first game state in which game balls are fired so as to flow down, and a second game state in which game balls are fired so as to cause game balls to flow down in the second flow path; A first state in which the game ball is guided to the first guide path by being rotated for each ball entry, and a second state in which the game ball is guided to a second guide path different from the first guide path. Switching means, a specific ball-in means for allowing a game ball flowing down the second taxiway to enter, and a specific ball-in means A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a game ball having entered the means, and a game flowing down the second flow path during a period in which the second game state is set by the setting means. A variable ball entry means that is changed to an open state so that the ball can easily enter, and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path even during a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. The switching means is configured to be rotated, and when the switching means is in the first state, the gaming machine is rotated by a game ball having entered the first state. Is arranged so that the magnetic force output from the magnet disposed in the switching means and the repulsive magnetic force are output from a predetermined position, and the flow is made to flow down the second guide path. Of the game balls, enter the specific entry means In which discharge channel is formed it can be discharged to never been game balls into the second guide path outside.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first flow path through which the game balls can flow, the second flow path through which the game balls flowing down the first flow path do not flow, the first flow path, and the second flow path Adjusting means for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball based on the operation of the player so that the game ball flows down to one of the two flow paths; and a game for causing the game ball to flow down to the first flow path. Setting means capable of setting a first game state in which a ball is fired and a second game state in which a game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down to the second flow path; Switching means for switching between a first state in which the game ball is guided to the first guide path by being rotated for each entering ball, and a second state in which the game ball is guided to a second guide path different from the first guide path; A specific ball entry means which allows a game ball flowing down the second taxiway to enter the ball, and a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. And a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path during the period in which the second game state is set by the setting device, and the ball is easily entered. And the variable ball input means is changed to an open state, and the switching means is rotated by a game ball flowing down the second flow path even during the period when the variable ball input means is in the open state. The gaming machine is configured such that when the switching means is in the first state, the gaming machine is rotated by the entering game ball to enter the first state. The magnet is arranged so that the magnetic force output from the magnet disposed at the second position and the repulsive magnetic force are output from a predetermined position, and can be regulated, and among the game balls flowing down the second guide path, Game balls that did not enter the ball entry means In which serial discharge channel capable of discharging into the second guide path outside is formed.

Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution device in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side in the state where a game ball won in the distribution device in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter in 1st Embodiment, the special design execution area, the normal design holding ball storage area, and the normal design holding ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol per random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the special hit type counter in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo variation table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a background selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the variation aspect of the special symbol displayed on a 3rd symbol display device, (b) is a pseudo symbol in the ceiling variation pattern displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a variation mode when a variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation mode when the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is started during the fluctuation | variation of the pseudo symbol other than the ceiling fluctuation | variation pattern displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying a player that a jackpot with a reduced time displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment has been achieved, and (b) of FIG. ) Is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying a player that a jackpot without a time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment has been achieved, and FIG. It is a figure showing typically the background display mode of precursor A displayed on the 3rd symbol display device, and (d) shows typically the background display mode of precursor B displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (E) is a diagram schematically showing a background display mode of the precursor C displayed on the third symbol display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution apparatus error notification control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution winning processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a distribution discharging process performed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a distribution position initialization process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a distribution position initialization process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a distribution error process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an ending setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pseudo-variation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a background selection process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side in the state where a game ball won in the distribution device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the perspective view which expanded the variable prize apparatus and the distribution prize apparatus in the big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd execution form. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter, the special symbol execution area, the normal symbol holding ball storage area, and the normal symbol holding ball execution area in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol random number table in the second embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a first ordinary symbol per random number table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a second ordinary symbol per random symbol table in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a figure showing typically the special hit type table in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a status selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo variation table in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a background selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a random number setting table in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a variation mode when a special symbol variation is started while the precursor A pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is changing. (B) schematically shows a variation mode when a special symbol is started to change while changing the precursor B pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation mode when the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol is started while changing the precursor C pseudo fluctuation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) illustrates a variation mode in a case where an interrupt normal pseudo variation mode corresponding to a hit of a normal symbol is started while the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is changing. It is the figure which showed typically, (b) is a normal normal corresponding to the hit of a normal symbol when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the pseudo symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment is stop-displayed. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation mode when the pseudo fluctuation mode is started. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution win processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows status determination processing which is one processing of distribution winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st distribution correction processing which is one processing of the normal entrance processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows random setting processing which is one processing of jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution error processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background selection process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a detailed view of the inside of the sorting prime mover 64 provided on the game board 13, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later is changed (for example, the color of the displayed character is changed). .

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emission mode by being turned on or flashing in accordance with a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for guiding balls, a distribution prize winning device 64, A two-start winning device 300, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The distribution prize device 64, the second starting port 300, the first variable prize device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A distribution winning device 64 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 64 when viewed from the front. The sorting prize winning device 64 is formed of a vertically elongated case body, and has a ball entrance 640 through which game balls can enter inside the sorting winning prize device 64 at an upper portion thereof. The entrance 640 includes a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed. Inside the distribution prize device 64, there is provided a first distribution rotation member 64a1 capable of distributing the game ball left and right by rotating. The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is rotatably supported by a case body constituting the distribution winning device 64.

  The case body constituting the sorting prize winning device 64 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate PC or the like) whose inside can be seen through. In the case body, a pattern printed with paint (for example, a pattern of ripples with a short interval or a character such as a numeral) so that the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 provided inside are difficult to visually recognize. Are drawn, and the movement of the game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64 can be visually recognized from the gap in the pattern.

  With such a configuration, the positions and states of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are hard to be recognized by the player, and by visually recognizing the distribution prize device 64 from outside the gaming machine, In addition, it is difficult to determine how many balls will win the first starting port 71.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is formed in a semicircular shape, and the wall portions protrude from the center of the semicircle in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction toward the front side of the gaming machine, and pass through the entrance 640. A first accommodating portion 64c1 and a second accommodating portion 64d1 capable of receiving the game balls. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is a wall portion that is formed vertically upward from the center of the semicircle toward the arc side and protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the semicircular arc directed upward. Assuming that a state in which is raised above the gaming machine is the origin, a state in which the first accommodation portion 64c1 is directed upward (in the direction of the entrance 640) of the gaming machine and a state in which the second accommodation portion 64d1 is oriented upward (into the entrance 640) Direction), and is rotatably supported about 90 degrees to the left and right. Specifically, when the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates rightward and the first storage portion 64c1 rotates to a position facing upward from the gaming machine, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 moves further rightward. Rotation is prohibited by contacting a stopper (not shown) that prohibits rotation in the direction. When the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is rotated to the left from the state where the first storage portion 64c1 is directed upward, the first distribution rotation is performed when the second storage portion 64d1 is positioned upward. When the member 64a1 comes into contact with a stopper (not shown) for preventing further rotation in the left direction, the rotation is prohibited. That is, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 sets the position where the first storage portion 64c1 faces upward as a rightward rotation region, and turns the position where the second storage portion 64d1 faces upward as left rotation. It is configured as an area.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 receives the game ball that has passed through the entrance 640 at the first accommodation portion 64c1 or the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. When a game ball is received in the first accommodating portion 64c1, the weight of the game ball causes the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 3), thereby moving the game ball to the first position. It guides to the first discharge guide path 64z1 that guides to the discharge port 650a1. Here, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right (a rotation angle with the origin where the state in which the magnet 64b1 is directed vertically upward is the origin). A magnet 64b1 is provided at the end of the boundary wall with the second housing portion 64d1.

  The sorting prize winning device 64 includes a second sorting rotating member 64a2, a third sorting rotating member 64a3, a fourth sorting rotating member 64a4, and a fifth sorting, which are configured similarly to the first sorting rotating member 64a1. The rotation member 64a5, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 are respectively attached. A second distribution rotation member 64a2 is attached to the lower right of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second accommodation portion 64d1 receive the game balls rolled on the first guide path 64z2. Have been. At the lower left of the second distribution rotation member 64a2, a third position is provided where the game balls distributed by the first accommodation portion 64c2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 are received by the game balls rolling on the second guide path 64z4. The distribution rotation member 64a3 is attached. A fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is attached to the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second accommodation portion 64d3 receive the game balls rolled on the third guide path 64z6. Have been. A fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is attached to the lower left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 at a position where the game balls distributed by the first accommodation portion 64c4 are received by the game balls rolling on the fourth guide path 64z8. ing. A sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is attached to the lower right of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second accommodation portion 64d5 receive the game balls rolled on the fifth guide path 64z10. Have been. A seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is attached to the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 at a position where the game balls distributed by the first accommodation portion 64c6 are received by the game balls rolling on the sixth guide path 64z12. ing. An eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is attached to the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second storage portion 64d7 receive the game balls rolled on the seventh guide path 64z14. Have been. In addition, the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 are respectively a game ball flowing down the first to seventh guidance paths 64z2 to 64z14 and the magnets 64b1 to 64b1 at positions of the distribution rotation members facing the gaming machine upward. 64b8 is arranged at a position where it collides.

  A first base-side magnet 900a1, a second base-side magnet 900a2, a third base-side magnet 900a3, and a fourth base-side magnet are provided on the back-side base body to which the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are attached. 900a4, a fifth base magnet 900a5, a sixth base magnet 900a6, a seventh base magnet 900a7, and an eighth base magnet 900a8 are arranged respectively. The first to eighth base-side magnets 900a1 to 900a8 face the front-rear direction of the gaming machine at positions where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 face vertically upward and at positions facing each other. Are arranged as follows.

  More specifically, the magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are configured to have polarities repelling each other. Specifically, the first base-side magnet 900a1 is configured by a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the back-side base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. . The first base-side magnet 900a1 is disposed and fixed such that the tip end faces the first distribution rotation member 64a1.

  The magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is also formed of a bar-shaped magnet similarly to the first base-side magnet 900a1, and the first distribution rotation is performed so that the tip end faces the first base-side magnet 900a1. It is fixed to the member 64a1. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates, and the first base-side magnet 900a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are positioned at a position where the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is directly above (on the center line of the entrance 640). This is the position where the magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 comes closest (the leading ends face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 faces directly above. Therefore, it is maintained at a position rotated left or right.

  Accordingly, when the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is located on the center line of the entrance 640 (a vertically upward position), the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is magnetized. And the first base-side magnet 900a1 repel, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates left or right, and either the first storage portion 64c1 or the second storage portion 64d1 is moved to the distribution prize device. The player faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the ball 64. Therefore, the entered game ball comes into contact with the boundary wall between the first accommodation portion 64c1 and the second accommodation portion 64d1, causing the ball to be clogged or causing the game ball to enter the first accommodation of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. It can be prevented from flowing down to the left or right without being accommodated in the portion 64c1 and the second accommodation portion d1.

  Further, when the magnet 64b1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 repel, for example, the first housing portion 64c1 receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and moves the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1. After the guidance, it is possible to prevent the first distribution rotation member 64a1 from turning right (the first housing portion 64c1 faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1, the second accommodation portion 64d1 is in a state of facing upward, and the game ball that has entered the first distribution winning device 64a1 next is the second ball. When the receiving portion 64d1 receives the game ball, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates about 180 degrees clockwise from the state by the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first guide path 64z2. As described above, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution prize winning device 64 to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2, and to win the prize.

  The second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 also have the same mechanism as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. The first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are normally configured to rotate by the weight of the game ball, but the main control is performed by operating the RAM erase switch 122, as described later. In the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110, in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015), the distribution position adjustment motor 263 of the distribution prize device 64 moves to the predetermined initial position. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 are respectively turned to predetermined initial positions (in this embodiment, positions for guiding game balls to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15). Moved and set. Here, the initial position is a position when the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e described later is 0 (a state in which 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution prize winning device 64). "1" indicating that the first accommodation portion 64c1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is facing upward, and is a position where the second accommodation portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 is facing upward. "0", indicating that the first storage portion 64c3 of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is facing upward, and "1" indicating that the second storage portion 64d4 of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is "0" indicating that the position is directed upward, "1" indicating that the first storage portion 64c5 of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is directed upward, and the sixth distribution rotation member. 64a6 at a position where the second storage portion 64d6 faces upward. "0", indicating that the first storage portion 64c7 of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is facing upward, and "1", indicating that the first storage portion 64d8 of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is facing upward. Is set to the initial position by setting "10101010" as continuous data of "0" indicating that it is a position facing upward.

  In addition, when the first distribution rotation member 64a1 distributes the game ball to the first guidance path 64z2, the second distribution rotation member 64a2 stores the game ball flowing down the first guidance path 64z2 in the first accommodation portion 64c2 or It is received by the second accommodation section 64d2 and guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 or the second guide path 64z4. As described above, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 continuously guide the game ball from the first guidance path 64z2 to the seventh guidance path 64z14, thereby forming the eighth distribution rotation. The game ball reaches the member 64a8. When a game ball is received by the first accommodation portion 64c8 of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 and is distributed to the eighth guide path 64z16, the game ball flowing down the eighth guide path 64z16 is guided to the first starting port 71. And enters the ball.

  In a state where the gaming machine is initialized, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 guide the game ball from the first discharge guide path 64z1 to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15, respectively. Is located in the position.

  Specifically, the first, third, fifth, and seventh distribution rotating members 64a1, 64a3, 64a5, and 64a7 are located at positions where the first housing portions 64c1, 64c3, 64c5, and 64c7 face upwards from the gaming machine (right side). (The position rotated by the maximum angle in the direction). On the other hand, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth distribution rotation members 64a2, 64a4, 64a6, and 64a8 are located at positions where the second housing portions 64d2, 64d4, 64d6, and 64d8 face the gaming machine (maximum in the left direction). (A position rotated by an angle).

  Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance 640 from the initial state, the game ball that has entered the first ball enters the first accommodation portion 64c1, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates leftward. Then, it is guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1. Thereby, the game balls are discharged to the sorting prize winning device 64 to the outside. At this time, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is stopped at a position where the second storage portion 64d1 faces upward. Next, the second game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and the first distribution rotation member 64a2 rotates rightward. The game balls are distributed to the first taxiway 64z2. The game ball that has flowed down the first guide path 64z2 enters the second accommodation portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2, and the second distribution rotation member 64a2 rotates rightward, and the second discharge guidance path 64z3. The game ball is distributed to.

  Next, the third game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the first accommodation portion 64c1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and is distributed to the first discharge guide path 64z1. The game ball that has entered the fourth ball enters the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, is guided to the first guide path 64z2, and enters the first accommodation portion 64c2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2. A game ball enters and is distributed to the second taxiway 64z4. In this way, it is necessary for four game balls to enter the entrance 640 before the second distribution rotation member 64a2 distributes the game balls to the second guide path 64z4. Similarly, until the third distribution rotation member 64a3 guides the game ball to the third guide path 64z6, it is necessary that eight game balls enter the ball entrance 640. Similarly, the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 has 16 balls, the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 has 32 balls, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 has 64 balls, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 has 128 balls, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a7. In the minute rotation member 64a8, 256 balls are required for distributing game balls from the fourth guideway 64z8 to the eighth guideway 64z16.

  That is, from the initial state of the sorting prize device 64 (zero game balls entered) until the game ball enters the first starting port 71, 256 game balls enter the sorting prize device 64. You need to ball. As will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 71, it is determined to be a jackpot (all jackpot random numbers are determined to be jackpots). Has a configuration in which a big hit always occurs. With this configuration, the player can play a game for the purpose of causing more game balls to enter the distribution prize device 64, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. Can be.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670a1 for detecting a stop position, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 guides the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1 (the first distribution rotation member 64a1). The main control device 110 determines whether the first accommodation section 64c1 is facing upward (upward) or the state where game balls are guided to the first guide path 64z2 (the second accommodation section 64d1 is facing upward). Of the MPU 201 can be detected. Similarly, a rotation angle sensor 670a2 is provided for the second distribution rotation member 64a2, a rotation angle sensor 670a3 is provided for the third distribution rotation member 64a3, and a rotation angle sensor 670a4 is provided for the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4. A rotation angle sensor 670a5 is provided for the distribution rotation member 64a5, a rotation angle sensor 670a6 is provided for the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, a rotation angle sensor 670a7 is provided for the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is provided. Are provided with rotation angle sensors 670a8, respectively.

  The rotation angle sensors 670a1 to 670a8 constitute the distribution position confirmation sensor 262, and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 make the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 pachinko machines with respect to the main controller 110. In a state where the machine 10 is turned to a position facing upward (a position turned rightward), “1” indicating a positive rotation angle is output, and the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 are turned upward. In a state where the camera has been turned to the facing position (the position turned to the left), “0” indicating a negative rotation angle is output.

  The game ball guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1 passes through the first discharge port 650a1, is discharged to the outside of the sorting and winning device 64, and flows down the front of the game board 13 again. The first discharge port 650a1 is configured by a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed, and is configured to be detectable by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the same configuration, the game ball guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 is from the second discharge port 650a2, and the game ball guided to the third discharge guide path 64z5 is from the third discharge port 650a3, and the fourth discharge guide path. The game ball guided to 64z7 is the fourth discharge port 650a4, the game ball guided to the fifth discharge guide path 64z9 is the fifth discharge port 650a5, and the game ball guided to the sixth discharge guide path 64z11 is the sixth ball. Game balls guided to the seventh discharge guide path 64z13 from the discharge port 650a6 are discharged from the seventh discharge guide path 650a7, and game balls guided to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15 are discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  Since the game balls that have passed through the entrance 640 and the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are respectively detected by the sensors, the game balls that have entered the sorting winning device 64 The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can grasp the number and the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 64 at present. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can recognize the number of game balls entering the distribution prize device 64 required until the next big hit. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, whether the number of game balls hitting in the sorting prize device 64 is equal to the number winning in the first starting port 71 (this execution) By determining (256 in the embodiment), it is possible to determine whether the game ball has been illegally won in the first starting port 71.

  Further, by grasping the number of game balls currently entering the distribution prize device 64, it is possible to recognize whether there is any game ball illegally entered. Specifically, for example, when a hole is opened from the outside of the sorting prize winning device 64 and game balls are made to enter from other than the passage opening 640, the number of discharges is larger than the number of passages. Thereby, fraud can be recognized.

  Furthermore, even in the case where a problem that the game balls are clogged in the sorting prize winning device 64 occurs, the difference between the number of the game balls passing through the entrance 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 is reduced. When a certain number (ten in the present embodiment) is notified, a ball jam can be detected early, and the game store can eliminate the ball jam.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a second distribution rotation member 64a2 is provided at the lower right of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and a third distribution rotation member 64a3 is provided at the lower left of the second distribution rotation member 64a2. To the lower right of the third distribution rotating member 64a3, the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5 to the lower left of the fourth distribution rotating member 64a4, and the right to the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5. The sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is disposed below, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is disposed at the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is disposed at the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7. By doing so, the use of the space in the left and right directions can be suppressed and the distribution prize winning device 64 can be compactly configured, as compared with the case where the distribution rotation members are arranged in the left direction or the right direction.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are arranged alternately (zigzag position) as shown in FIG. 3, but are arranged side by side in one direction to the left or right. By doing so, the initial position can be set by moving all the distribution rotation members in one direction when setting the initial position, so that the initial position setting process can be easily performed.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and ten or more distribution rotation members may be arranged. You may comprise so that less than eight may be arrange | positioned. As described above, by changing the number of distribution rotating members, the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 can be changed, and the probability of obtaining a big hit can be adjusted. it can.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of distribution rotation members can be adjusted at a game store side. Specifically, the distribution rotation member and the starting port are each configured to be detachable, and the game store side performs the game by adjusting according to the convenience of the game store by attaching and setting according to convenience. be able to. In addition, since it can be changed depending on the day, it can be adjusted by changing the sales so that the balance between the game store and the player becomes appropriate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the first starting port 71, a random number value is set so that all are determined to be hits. Good.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. 4 indicates the flowing direction of the game ball guided to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16, and OUT indicates the game guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15. The downward direction of the sphere is shown.

  Although omitted in FIG. 3, as shown in FIG. 4, first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 face the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 of the sorting and winning device 64. Each is provided. The first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 are formed by walls protruding toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Have been. Further, even when the game balls flowing down the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 are strong, the game balls are guided by the first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8, so that the game balls are moved to the first to eighth positions. The disadvantage of being discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 without being guided by the distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. On the right side of the center of the game board 13, a normal symbol starting port 67 is provided. The normal symbol starting port 67 is a gate-type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. Are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), and then a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○” or “X”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. As will be described later, in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0% (the random number value determined to be a hit is not set). On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the winning probability is set to 100% (all random numbers are determined to be hits).

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (non-working time), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0%. (For example, 1/1000). Here, in the normal gaming state, the game ball is fired on the right side of the game area, that is, the right side (a game method in which the game ball is made to win in the normal symbol start-up opening 67 in order to win the normal symbol). It is only necessary to set a probability that the operation will be advantageous to the player.

  When it is determined that a normal symbol has been won, a symbol “○” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory is operated, and the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, which are normally maintained in an upright state, are raised from the state in which the blades 300a, 300b stand substantially vertically. The game balls move in a V-shape (reverse C-shape), and the game balls are guided by the blades 300a and 300b, so that the game balls enter a state where they can easily enter the ball for a predetermined time (3s in the present embodiment). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been removed, a symbol “x” indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol has been removed is lit on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, is provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, among the balls won in the ordinary symbol starting port 67 by lighting up. The number of rounds during the big hit and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The seven-segment display 37b includes two right and left seven-segment LEDs. On the left and right 7-segment LEDs, a special symbol indicating a determination result of a lottery game based on winning of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is dynamically displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (in the present embodiment, the center of the seven segments). Is blinked), and then stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out of order, a symbol “−−” indicating the out of which one central segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the determination is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation, such as the symbols “33” and “77”, is displayed. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, it is always determined to be a jackpot (all the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol are determined to be a jackpot). Therefore, the change of the special symbol is started and the stopped symbol is a symbol indicating a big hit.

  The variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but a variation time is set in the variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not (big hit lottery) and the jackpot type is also determined. Do. The jackpot types determined here are, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot A (100 time reduction periods for a 16R jackpot ordinary symbol, ie, a jackpot with a time saving of 100), a jackpot B (0 time reduction periods for a 16R jackpot ordinary symbol 0 times, That is, a time-saving big hit) is prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "77" is displayed for the jackpot A and "33" is displayed for the jackpot B, for example).

  Here, the "big hit A" is a big hit with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, and after the big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state described later. In this time-saving gaming state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, the probability of being determined as a hit is from 0% (no random value determined to be a hit) to 100% (all random numbers are determined to be a hit). To be determined). The time-saving game state is continuously executed until the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches 100, and when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches 100, the game is shifted to the normal game state. Here, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a hit is set to 0% when a game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a special symbol (third symbol) is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a prize (start prize) in the first orifice 71 or the second orifice 300. ) Is provided with a third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are special symbols. Is displayed as one of In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol similar to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a pseudo symbol. As for the pseudo symbol, as will be described later, a symbol similar to the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol in a predetermined fluctuating pattern based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64. Done. In the case of the special symbol variable display, the special symbol variable display is also started in the first symbol display device 37, but for the pseudo symbol, the pseudo symbol variable display is performed only by the third symbol display device 81. .

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, when a game ball has won the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, it is determined that all are hits. A variation pattern that is a big hit is set for each of the case and the second starting port 300.

  FIG. 11A shows a variation pattern of a special symbol selected based on the fact that a game ball has won the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure showing a certain normal special fluctuation pattern. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 in a case where the pseudo symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the left, middle, and right symbols (in the present embodiment, numerals 1 to 9) form a loop (1 → 2 →).・ ・ →→ 9 → 1) High-speed variable display is started in ascending order. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is established, and only the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed. In the reach state, the sound “reach” is output from the sound output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the character "Achievement of heaven!" Is displayed below the area of the third symbol display device 81 where the special symbol is displayed, and the player receives 256 balls. Has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, and a notification indicating that the gaming ball has won a prize is displayed in the first starting port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has hit a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, if the gaming ball wins in the first starting port 71, the gaming machine always wins a jackpot. Therefore, the player recognizes that the winning in the first starting port 71 results in a big hit. . Therefore, the player determines that the number of balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are to be won in the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 is directly connected to the jackpot. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 in the sorting prize winning device 64 has entered the sorting prize winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the character “Arrival at heaven!”. Can be recognized as a jackpot.

  FIG. 11B shows a variation in the ceiling variation pattern selected when the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 is 256 among the variation patterns of the pseudo symbol shown in FIG. It is a figure showing a ceiling special fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol selected when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started when displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the ceiling variation pattern of the pseudo symbol, left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (in the present embodiment, numerals 1 to 9) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order. Not shown). Next, the left and right pseudo symbols have the same number (in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped at "7"), and the "reach" voice is output from the voice output device 226. Is done. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, and the symbol of the closed door is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 11B, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is displayed. The symbol is replaced as it is as a special symbol, and a diagram in which the closed door is opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11B, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message “Arrived in heaven!” Is displayed below the special symbol. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred.

  Note that this ceiling change pattern is the same time as the time required for a game ball to enter the first starting port 71 after entering the entrance port 640 of the sorting prize device 64 (time set at the time of design). The variable time is set in. Therefore, after the display of the fluctuation of the ceiling fluctuation pattern is started and the fluctuation time ends, the game ball will be awarded to the first starting port 71, so that the replacement with the special symbol is smoothly performed, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the change is a pseudo symbol change or a special symbol change, and the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol based on the ball entry into the entrance 640 that does not win the first starting port 71. Even with the display, it is possible to expect a big hit (winning to the first starting port 71).

  Further, when switching from the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern to the ceiling special variation pattern of the special symbol, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed, and then the variation display of the ceiling special symbol is changed. It may be configured to start.

  FIG. 12 shows a third symbol display device 81, in which a pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern, and a special symbol selected when a game ball is won in the first starting port 71. It is a figure showing a display mode of a change special change pattern which is a change pattern.

  As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 12, when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, as shown in the diagram in FIG. When the special symbol variation display is started in the special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol that has been variation displayed disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. After that, the same special symbol on the left and right is displayed in the “reach state” in which the display is stopped, and the character “Arrival at heaven!” Is displayed. After that, the game is stopped and displayed with a special symbol of “777” to notify the player that the big hit has occurred.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling variation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a case of a jackpot, and even if the player does not have the ceiling variation pattern, the player has an expectation for the jackpot. Can be made. In addition, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give freshness and to pay attention to the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, a first starting port switch or a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first start port switch and the second start port switch are turned on, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 are also one of the winning ports in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins.

  On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally long rectangular variable winning device 65 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery relating to the jackpot of the lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined jackpot type, and both the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a privilege game state that is advantageous to the player. Is performed.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 stops the first special symbol with a symbol showing a hit based on winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, and based on the big hit type. The opening / closing operation is set, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win any of the winning ports 63, 65a, 71, and 300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIGS. 5 and 5). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. Various data and control programs for executing these processes are stored in the ROM 202, and a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes is stored in the RAM 203. Is provided.

  Here, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a random number table 202a per special symbol, a special type table 202b, a random number table per normal symbol 202c, a fluctuation pattern table for big hits 202d, a fluctuation pattern table (normal pattern) 202e, a normal pattern At least the stop type command 202f, the average arrival second data 202g, the distribution initial position data 202h, the distribution role object position data 202i, and the ceiling arrival number data 202j are set (stored).

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol random number table 202a stores the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. 5 is a data table storing random numbers determined to be. In the present embodiment, all the values (0 to 109) of the random number counter C1 per special symbol are stored in the random number per special symbol table 202a as random numbers determined to be hits. In the present embodiment, the setting is made such that all random numbers are determined to be hits. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and random numbers determined to be hits may be appropriately set.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the special hit type table 202b is a table for determining the type of the big hit to be executed when the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the lottery game. In the present embodiment, after the 16R jackpot has been executed, a jackpot A in which a time saving game state is set, and after the 16R jackpot has been executed, a jackpot B in which a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set is set. ing. If the value of the special hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is "0 to 79", the big hit A is set ( Determined), and if it is "80 to 99", the special hit type table 202b is set so that the big hit B is set (determined).

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the random number per ordinary symbol table 202c stores random numbers in the ordinary random number per symbol table 202c determined to be a win in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state) and the time saving gaming state. This is the data table that was created. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a random number value determined to be a hit is not set. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined that all of the values of the random number counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting port 67 are out of range. In the time-saving game state, all random numbers are set as random numbers in the normal symbol per symbol random number table 202c. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, all the values of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (0 to 99) acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting port 67 are determined to be winning.

  The big hit change pattern table 202d stores a change display mode (dynamic display mode) that is a special symbol hit. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 71 and the second starting opening 300, all of the winnings are won and there is no case of a loss. ing. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, dedicated jackpot variation patterns are respectively set for winning of the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300.

  The jackpot variation pattern for the winning at the first starting port 71 is selected when the pseudo symbol is fluctuating and stopped, or when the pseudo symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern. The switching special fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in the special ceiling fluctuation pattern and the pseudo fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern is set.

  As the big hit variation pattern for the winning in the second starting port 300, a special time-saving variation pattern is set. The time-saving special fluctuation pattern is constituted by a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds, and is displayed in a state where predetermined symbols (for example, “777” or the like) are aligned with a double-eye pattern to notify that a big hit has occurred. Has become. With this configuration, the game time in the time-saving game state can be shortened, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early because the big hit occurs at short intervals. In addition, the game store can shorten the time during which the game balls are not consumed during the time-saving game, thereby increasing the sales.

  The variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e is a variation pattern table in which the variation display mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is stored. When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. Are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), and then a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”or“ X ”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). . When a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, two types of variation patterns of normal symbols are set in a variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e, a hit variation pattern and a deviation variation pattern. The hit fluctuation pattern and the off fluctuation pattern are both set with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. As described above, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is constituted by the short fluctuation time, the time-saving gaming state can be further shortened. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games by efficiently using the game time. Also, the game store can increase more sales.

  In the stop type command 202f for the normal symbol, a command corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol and the stop type of the normal symbol is stored.

  The reaching average seconds data 202g is the average seconds data calculated at the time of designing the time required from when a game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 to when it enters the first starting port 71. It is remembered. In the present embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is stored as “5 seconds to 7 seconds”.

  Further, in this embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is configured to be set in advance based on the design value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball may be entered from the ball port 640, and the average arrival time may be set based on the time required to enter the ball, or the first starting port 71 may be won each time. It may be configured such that the number of seconds to reach is measured and the average number of seconds is updated every time. With this configuration, even when the arrival seconds are different for each of the gaming machines due to the difference in the accuracy of the members constituting the distribution prize winning device 64, the accurate arrival seconds can be set. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately identify whether or not fraud has occurred.

  Also, as described above, when the average arrival time is measured and set for each pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the pseudo ceiling fluctuation pattern is determined based on the measured and set average arrival time. Etc. may be set. With this configuration, the switching from the pseudo symbol to the special symbol can be performed more smoothly and naturally, so that it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 flow down the upper surface of the game board 13 and are discharged from the out ports 66. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and a common guide path through which the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 flow may be provided to guide the game balls to the general winning opening. When a game ball enters the general winning opening, for example, a prize ball such as three balls may be paid out to the player. With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 can perform an effect of determining whether a game ball entering the entrance 640 enters the general winning opening or the first starting opening 71. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, by making a prize ball payout in the general winning opening and paying out the prize ball, the base of the pachinko machine 10 (difference between the launched game ball and the paid game ball) until the first starting port 71 is won is played. Can be adjusted so as not to be too disadvantageous to the player (the investment amount of the player becomes too large).

  The distribution initial position data 202h stores the initial positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Here, the initial position stores the position at which the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game ball to the first to eighth discharge guiding paths 64z1 to 64z15, respectively. The distribution initial position data 202h is used in the distribution position initialization processing (FIG. 25, S1015) executed in the start-up processing (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on. Used when initializing.

  The distribution role object position data 202i corresponds to the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize device 64 (the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e), and the first to eighth distributions. The positions of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 (the positions where the first storage portions 64c1 to 64c8 face upward or the positions where the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 face upward) are stored.

  Specifically, when the value of the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e is 0 (a state in which 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution prize winning device 64), the first distribution rotating member 64a1 has a second "1" indicating that the first housing portion 64c1 is located upward, "0" indicating that the second housing portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotating member 64a2 is facing upward, "1" indicating that the first accommodation portion 64c3 of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is facing upward, and is a position where the second accommodation portion 64d4 of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is facing upward. "0", indicating that the first accommodation portion 64c5 of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is at a position facing upward, and "2" indicating that the second accommodation portion 64d6 of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is facing upward. “0” indicating the position facing upward, the seventh "1" indicating that the first housing portion 64c7 of the rotating member 64a7 is facing upward, indicating that the first housing portion 64d8 of the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 is facing upward. “10101010” is set as data in which “0” is continuous. It should be noted that “10101010” is set in the above-described distribution initial position data 202h.

  If the value of the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e is 1 (a state in which one game ball has entered the distribution prize winning device 64), the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is directed upward. Since it moves to the position, “00101010”, which has been changed to “0” indicating that the second storage portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is facing upward, is set.

  As described above, the sorting role object position data 202i is obtained by converting the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at the time when the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64. And stored as data tables. This sorting role object position data 202i indicates that the value of the sorting winning prize ball number counter 203e is “0 to 255” (0 to 255 balls have been thrown into the sorting prize winning device 64 (the state where 256 balls have been thrown is 0). ) Are set corresponding to each value.

  The detection of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is detected based on the output value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262. The distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The positions at which the magnets 64b1 to b8 face vertically upward in the gaming machine are set to 0 degrees, and are set so as to have a positive value when rotated to the right and to a negative value when rotated to the left. . Therefore, when the value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is a positive value, it is determined that the first storage units 64c1 to 64c8 are facing upward (the data of the distribution role object position data 202i is “1”). Is determined). On the other hand, if the value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is a negative value, it is determined that the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 are facing upward (the data of the distribution role object position data 202i is “0”). Is determined).

  The ceiling arrival number data 202j stores the value of the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e from when the distribution prize device 64 is in the initial state until a game ball wins in the first starting port 71. That is, the number of balls entered into the distribution prize device 64 required for the game balls to win in the first starting port 71 is stored. The ceiling arrival number data 202j is provided for recognizing the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e required until the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 wins the first starting port 71. In the present embodiment, when 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64, the 256th game ball wins the first starting port 71, that is, the state in which the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 255. In this case, the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e is 0 (excluding 0 set by initialization) in the ceiling arrival number data 202j. Is set. That is, the value obtained by adding 1 to 255 from the sorting prize ball count counter 203e and updating it to 0 corresponds to the ceiling arrival number data 202j.

  In this embodiment, the ceiling arrival number 202j is set in advance. However, when the sorting prize ball counter 203e is updated to 0 by adding 1 from 255, the 256th sorting ball is sorted. A configuration may be such that a ceiling arrival flag indicating that the ball has been hit is set in the prize winning device 64, and the flag is turned on.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are set. , An initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. The random number per normal symbol C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number per symbol counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27). The updated value is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol execution area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning to the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. When the special symbol is changing, only the prize balls (three game balls in the present embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring the respective counter values and the like.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the winning ball of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is configured such that the setting as the holding ball is not provided when a prize is made during the change of the special symbol, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls may be set regardless of whether or not there is an upper limit number.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The random number counter C1 per special symbol is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 109) in order. It returns to the structure. In particular, when the special symbol random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special symbol random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special symbol random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 109, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27).

  The value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting opening 71 or the second starting opening 300 (starting winning). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203c1 corresponding to the winning opening in the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the special symbol per random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special symbol per random number counter C1 is set to If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot set in the random number table 202a (“0 to 109” in the present embodiment), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot.

  The special symbol random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. In the special symbol per random number counter C1, the number of the random numbers (winning value) to be a big hit is 110 and "0 to 109" is stored in the random number per special symbol table 202a. That is, the values of all the special symbol per random number counters C1 are determined to be big hits.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type when a big hit occurs. The special hit type counter C2 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). , The value returns to 0 after reaching. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 (start win). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a of the RAM 203.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the special hit type table 202b (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 16 and the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. There is a "big hit B" in which a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set after the game.

  In the special hit type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 9, the value "0-79" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the big hit A, and the value "80-99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the big hit B. ing.

  When the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (in the present embodiment, all values are set to the value that makes a big hit), the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is stored. The big hit type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is determined from the special hit type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the big hit A is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80”, the big hit B is determined as the big hit type. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special jackpot type table 202b is defined so that the jackpot A is selected with a probability of about 80% in the case of a jackpot, and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 20%. I have.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. Ordinarily, the random number counter C4 per symbol is configured as a loop counter which is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67. Then, the value of the random number which is the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the ordinary symbol per random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number that is a win set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol.

  Further, when the normal symbol per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal random number counter per symbol C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number counter C4 per symbol is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (through gate). You. The number of random numbers determined to be a hit is 0 in the normal gaming state, that is, in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), the normal symbol does not win. In the time saving game state, the number is 100, and the range is "0 to 99". That is, since it is determined that all random numbers are hits, the game ball is usually set to the symbol starting port 67. If you pass, it is a configuration that always wins. When it is determined that a hit has occurred, a symbol “O” is illuminated and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83, and the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are reduced to a time-saving game. In the state, the operation of opening for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment) is performed once (in the normal game state, the symbol is usually not set because no hit is set). The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter per symbol C4 (value = 0 to 99), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200 in FIG. 27).

  When the game ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port 67, when the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed and each counter value based on the retained ball is not stored in the ordinary symbol retained ball storage area 203b, It is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area provided in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b. In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment). Is stored in the ordinary random number counter storage area 203b of the number of suspensions (normal symbol suspensions 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the ordinary symbol random number counter C4. When a random value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is set to ON, and based on the random value, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped or the normal symbol is stopped. Is set to off when the data is shifted to the immediately preceding holding area as a result of digestion. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to ON. The determination as to whether or not data is stored in the reserved area or whether or not the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner is executed based on which reserved area or the ordinary symbol of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 24). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a special symbol execution area 203a, an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b, an ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a time reduction counter 203d, a sorting winning ball number counter 203e, a sorting discharging ball number counter 203f, and a sorting winning timer. 203g, a distribution winning flag 203h, and at least a memory area 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol are stored, and when the special symbol is stopped for the variable display, the first start port 71 or the second starting port 71a. This is a storage area in which various acquired counter values are stored when a game ball wins at the starting port 300. Each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is cleared (erased) to 0 when the special symbol stops changing.

  More specifically, the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a stores the respective values of the special symbol random number counter C1 and the special symbol type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in accordance with the detection of the start winning. You. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 71 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 reads the values of the special symbol random number counter C1 and the special symbol counter C2 from the counter buffer. Is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a. When the MPU 201 detects the timing of starting the execution of the fluctuation effect (data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a while the special symbol is stopped), the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol is detected. Processing such as display setting of the display device 81 is executed.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 obtained from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the special symbol execution area 203a, the MPU 201 converts the data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a into a special symbol described later. Referring to the fluctuation start process (S204 in FIG. 16), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a fluctuation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing a random number counter C4 for each ordinary symbol acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in accordance with detection of a winning start to the ordinary symbol opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed (start winning) to the normal symbol starting port 67 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 outputs the normal symbol random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. Is obtained and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The ordinary symbol flag provided in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4 and the normal symbol flag) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. . In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls are sequentially arranged in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting opening 67 (start winning) from the holding areas where the data is free, in order from the earliest digested holding area ( (Reserved areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls) are stored.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (value of the normal winning random number counter C4) corresponding to each winning start stored in the ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to one starting winning is provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Normally shifts to the symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c allows a game ball to pass through a normal symbol starting port 67 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as a "start winning"). ), The number of pending balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) is up to four times each. It is a counter for counting. The ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a counter that stores the total number of retained balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the ordinary symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process (S1014 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed (see S805 in FIG. 21).

  The time saving counter 203d is a counter area in which the number of time savings 100 is set after the big hit game of big hit A is executed. When the number of time savings is set, the normal symbol per symbol for time saving gaming state is set in the random number per symbol table 202c until the number of time savings is set to zero. In addition, when a symbol "O" indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the operation of opening the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory in the opening time (1s in the present embodiment). Is executed once.

  The time reduction counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the time reduction counter 203d becomes 0, the time shift game state is shifted to the normal game state, and the normal symbol random number counter 202c is shifted to the normal game state. A random number table per normal symbol for a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set.

  The distribution prize ball number counter 203e is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a game ball has won the entrance 640 of the distribution prize device 64. In a state where the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0, and in a distribution winning award process (FIG. 18, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, a game ball has passed through the entrance 640. Is incremented by one. It is initialized to 0 when the big hit game is started.

  The number-of-distributed-discharge-balls counter 203f is a counter that is incremented by one each time a game ball passes through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution prize device 64. In a state where the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0. In the distribution discharge processing (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the game balls are set to the first to eighth discharge ports. When it is determined that the signal has passed any one of 650a1 to 650a8, 1 is added. In addition, based on the start of the big hit game, the sorting and discharging ball number counter 203f is initialized.

  In the present embodiment, the sorting and discharging ball number counter 203f counts the number of game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharging ports 650a1 to 650a8. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. , A 1 may be added, and when a game ball is discharged from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8, the count value may be decremented by 1. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls that are winning in the distribution winning device 64.

  When a game ball passes through the entrance 640 of the distribution prize winning device 64, the distribution prize timer 203g adds the value of the distribution prize ball counter 203e to a set counter value (in this embodiment, 1 is added from 255). If the updated value is 0), it is a timer for measuring the flowing time of the game ball. That is, the fact that the value of the distribution winning counter 203e is 0, which is updated by adding 1 from 255, means that the 256th game ball has entered, and therefore, after entering the entrance 640, The time until the ball enters the first starting port 71 is measured.

  When the game ball passes through the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64, the value of the sorting prize timer 203g is set to 0, and the start of the measurement is set. In the distribution error process (S1207 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, if the distribution prize flag 203h is set to ON, 1 is added. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution prize timer 203g is set to zero.

  The distribution prize flag 203h is a flag indicating that the 256th game ball (the distribution prize ball number counter 203e) has entered the distribution prize device 64. Specifically, the distribution prize flag 203g is set when the game ball passes through the entrance 640 in the distribution prize processing (S105 in FIG. 18) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the value of the number counter 203e is the set counter value (0 updated by adding 1 from 255 in the present embodiment), that is, the 256th game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64. If set to on. In the start winning process (S107 in FIG. 20, which is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110), when the game ball enters the first starting port 71, if the distribution winning flag 203h is on, the flag is set to off. Is done. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution prize flag 203h is set to off.

  The other memory area 203i is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, when it is determined that the 256th game ball, which is the number of game balls prize in the first starting port 71, has entered the ball entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64, the game ball is placed in the first position. Since it is configured to measure the flow-down time until a prize enters the first starting port 71, if a game ball prizes in the first starting port 71 in a time longer or shorter than a time assumed in advance by design, an injustice is detected. Judgment can be suppressed by determining that there is a possibility that the operation has been performed and notifying an error or the like.

  If it is determined that the number of game balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) that will win the first start-up port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 has entered, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. , It is possible to determine in advance that the first starting port 71 is to be won, and to execute the control. When a winning is made to the first starting port 71, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By determining whether or not the first winning opening flag 203h is off, if a winning occurs in the first starting opening 71, an error or the like is notified to notify the first starting opening 71 by fraud. Winning can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing drive of the specific winning opening 65a are opened / closed forward with the lower side as an axis. MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erase signals SG2 output from a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  In the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, at least a pseudo fluctuation table 222a and a background selection table 222b are set. Although not shown, a control program executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, fixed value data, and the like are also stored in the ROM 222.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the pseudo fluctuation table 222a includes a fluctuation pattern for displaying a pseudo symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner in accordance with the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d and the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a. Are stored in association with the values of. As the types of the fluctuation patterns, a normal deviation fluctuation pattern, a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach A fluctuation pattern, a super reach B fluctuation pattern, a precursor fluctuation pattern, and a ceiling fluctuation pattern are set.

  In the normal deviation fluctuation pattern, three numbers 1 to 9 as one of the pseudo symbols are arranged on the third symbol display device 81 in a line on the left, center, and right, and are displayed in ascending order for a predetermined time (for example, 2 During the second display, the display is changed at a high speed and then stopped and displayed with different numbers (for example, “456”) in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation until all the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed is 3 seconds.

  In the normal reach variation pattern, three numbers 1-9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side on the left, middle, and right, and during a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), After the pseudo symbols are variably displayed in ascending order at a high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped oscillating with the same number (for example, “7”), and then a voice “reach” is output from the voice output device 226 to reach the reach state. After that, the medium symbols are displayed in a low-speed, fluctuating order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed in a different pattern from the left and right patterns (for example, “757”). The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is 10 seconds.

  In the super reach A fluctuation pattern, three numerical symbols of 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in the left, middle, and right, and are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In the meantime, after the pseudo symbols are variably displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the voice output device 226, After the reach state is reached, a character different from the numerical pseudo symbol (for example, a girl in a swimsuit with a polka dot pattern) is displayed. The numeric symbol pattern of the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed along with the character, and the girl performs an operation of stopping the numeric symbol, and stops at a numeric symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, “757”). The change time from the start of the variable display of the numeric symbols to the stop display of all the numeric symbols is 15 seconds.

  The super reach B fluctuation pattern is different from the super reach A fluctuation pattern in a girl's swimsuit as a displayed character. Specifically, a girl wearing a red swimsuit is displayed. In other respects, the same fluctuation display as in Super Reach A is performed.

  In the precursor reach variation pattern, three numerical symbols of 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side on the left, middle, and right sides for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols are variably displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing at the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226, and the reach is output. After the state is reached, the text "Slightly closer to heaven!" Is displayed. The middle symbol is displayed at a low speed and displayed in ascending order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed in a different pattern from the left and right patterns (for example, “757”). The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is constituted by 20 seconds. In this way, by displaying the characters “a little more to the heavens!”, The player can determine that the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 will result in the first starting port 71 being awarded. Can be recognized as approaching.

  Since this precursor fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected only when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d is “201 to 254”, the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d is It is also a fluctuation pattern that notifies (value range).

  In the ceiling variation pattern, three numbers 1-9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in a horizontal line on the left, the center, and the right for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). During the period, after the pseudo symbols are displayed in the ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing at the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the voice output device 226. After reaching the reach state, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11B, the three numeral symbols are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, and the picture of the closed door is displayed. . The time until the picture of the closed door is displayed is constituted by a fluctuation time of 6 seconds, and the middle symbol is displayed in a state of fluctuation and display at high speed.

  The ceiling change pattern is a change pattern selected when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is 255, and is selected when a game ball is to win the first starting port 71. That is, the ceiling variation pattern is configured in a variation mode that is linked to the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, in order to link with the fluctuation of the special symbol, the average time required from when the game ball passes through the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 to when the first ball 71 is awarded is 5 seconds to 7 seconds. It has a variation time of 6 seconds which is within the range of seconds. Thereby, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, it is possible to smoothly switch to the special symbol change display, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Further, by setting the time to an intermediate time of the average time, switching can be performed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d increases, it is difficult to select the normal deviation fluctuation pattern (the number of values assigned to the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is small). I have. Also, if the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is large (for example, “201 to 254”), the super reach A fluctuation pattern is easily selected (the number of values assigned to the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is large). ) Is configured. As a result, when the frequency of displaying the super reach A fluctuation pattern increases, the number of gaming balls that have won the sorting prize winning device 64 may be close to the number that will win the first starting port 71. Can be expected. Also, when the game is started, it is not known what the state of the distribution winning device 64 is (the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8), There is an interest in how much the game ball must be made to enter the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 before winning. Here, the type of the variation pattern that is variably displayed in the pseudo symbol is changed in the selection rate in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize apparatus 64 (the value of the subordinate distribution prize ball number counter 223d). Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the current number of balls entering the distribution prize device 64. Therefore, the player can be interested even in the variation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected regardless of the jackpot determination, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the background selection table 222b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in association with the value of the follow-up winning prize ball number counter 223d and the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a. A plurality of background images are respectively set. As the type of the background image, a normal background, a precursor A background, a precursor B background, and a precursor C background are set.

  The normal background is a blue background image (not shown). As shown in FIG. 13C, the precursor A background is a background image showing “sunny” in which a sun pattern is displayed on the upper right on a normal blue background. The precursor B background is a background image indicating “cloudy” in which a white cloud is displayed on a normal blue background, as shown in FIG. The precursor C background is a background image showing a "storm" in which a black rain cloud is displayed on a normal blue background and rain is displayed from the rain cloud as shown in FIG. 13E.

  As the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d increases, the ratio of selecting the precursor A background decreases, and the ratio of selecting the precursor B background and the precursor C background increases. When the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is 255 (that is, the number of winning balls (256 in the present embodiment) that causes the first prize opening 71 to win the distribution prize winning device 64). When the ball is entered), the precursor C background is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a.

  Specifically, when the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is “0 to 60”, of the 199 values of the pseudo selection counter 223a, 30 are the precursor A background and 19 are the precursor A background. Nine backgrounds are assigned to the precursor C background. Similarly, when the value of the sub-distribution winning ball counter 223d is “61 to 149”, 25 are assigned to the precursor A background, 24 to the precursor B background, and nine to the precursor C background. When the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d is “150 to 200”, 10 are assigned to the precursor A background, 29 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 19 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the sub-distribution winning ball counter 223d is "201 to 254", six are assigned to the precursor A background, 33 to the precursor B background, and 29 to the precursor C background.

  In this way, when the value approaches “255” which is the value of the follow-up winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71, the precursor B background and the precursor C background are selected. The percentage to be set is large. If the value is “255” which is the value of the follow-up winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71, the precursor C background is selected. When a game ball wins at the starting port 71, the sign C background is often displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in many cases. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the first starting port 71 will win when the precursor C background is displayed.

  Further, when the precursor B background or the precursor C background is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player determines that the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 64 is displayed in the first starting port 71. The player can play the game expecting that the number of balls to be won (256 in the present embodiment) is close to winning. Further, since the selection ratio of the type of background selected by the number of balls entering the sorting prize device 64 is set to be changed, the current number of balls entering the sorting device 64 depends on the type of the selected background image. Can be provided with a fun that the player predicts. Therefore, even if the number of balls in the distribution winning device 64 is actually 50, if the precursor C background is selected and displayed, the player is not close to 256 in number of balls. It can be expected that the game can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Although the selection of the background image will be described later, in the background selection process (S1613 in FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the number of balls (remaining) in the sorting prize device 64 is determined. When the value of the in-prize-winning counter 223f is larger than 3, the background image is selected, and the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the selected background image.

  The RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is provided with at least a pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a sub-discharge ball count 223e, a sub-prize counter 223f, and another memory area 223g. ing.

  The pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is a counter used when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a pseudo symbol from the pseudo fluctuation table 222a or when selecting a background image from the background selection table 222b. The pseudo variation selection counter 223a is a counter value configured with a value in the range of 0 to 198, and is incremented by one in the main process (FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, and is updated. When 1 is added to the upper limit value “198”, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. When the power is turned on, the initial value is set to 0.

  The fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that a fluctuation pattern command of a special symbol has been received from the main control device 110. When the power is turned on, it is set to off, and in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received. If set, it is set to on. In the variable display setting process (S1611 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the setting is turned off.

  The stop type selection flag 223c is a flag indicating that a stop type command output by the main control device 110 has been received. When the game machine is powered on, it is set to off. If it is determined in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 that the stop type command output from the main control device 110 has been received, the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on. Is set. In the variable display setting process (S1611 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the setting is turned off.

  The subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d is a counter that indicates the number of gaming balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64. When receiving the distributed prize ball number command output from the main controller 110, the subordinate distributed prize ball number counter 223d is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the sorting winning ball count command is a value indicating 0, the value obtained by subtracting 1 is 255. That is, the value “0 to 255” of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d corresponds to 1 to 256 game balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64 (the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d). 0 corresponds to 1). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to 0, and in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 31, S1614), the number of distributed winning prize balls output by the main control device 110 By receiving the command, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the sorting winning ball counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Various data stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is configured to be backed up for a predetermined period by a backup power supply when a power failure occurs.

  The second-distribution-discharged-ball counter 223e is a counter indicating the number of game balls that have been discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. When receiving the distributed ball count command output from the main control device 110, the sub-discharged ball count counter 223e is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the distribution / discharge number command is a command indicating 0, subtracting 1 gives 255. That is, the value “0-255” of the subordinate distributed ball discharge counter 223e corresponds to the number of game balls discharged from the distribution winning device 64, which is 1 to 256, respectively. A value of 0 corresponds to one). When the game machine is powered on, it is set to 0, and in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, the number of sorted discharge balls output by the main control device 110 When the command is received, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the sorting and discharging ball counter 203f stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  The follow-in prize counter 223f is a counter indicating the number of game balls entering (remaining) in the distribution prize device 64. In the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the receiving prize counter 223f is incremented by 1 when the distribution control prize ball number command output from the main control device 110 is received. When the minute ejection ball number command is received, 1 is subtracted. Therefore, when there is a game ball entering the sorting prize winning device 64, the counter value indicates the number thereof, and when there is no game ball in the sorting winning device 64, the counter value becomes 0. I have. The value of the in-prize prize counter 223f is used in the background selection process (S1613 in FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to change the background. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-prize-winning counter 223f is equal to or greater than 4 (a value greater than 3). If the value is equal to or greater than 4, a process of changing the background is executed.

  The other memory area 223g is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erasure switch (FIG. 5, 122). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  When the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is depressed when the power is turned on (while the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122)), the RAM erase switch circuit 253 backs up the data to the main controller 110. This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing data. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol and various lotteries such as selection of a winning or a variation pattern for the winning. For this reason, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery to determine whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed by sub-control. Since the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device performs the control, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box called a board box, which is made up of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is caulked with a member called a "sealing member" for preventing fraud so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark such as whether the member forming the through hole is destroyed or the sealing member is destroyed. .

  Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (FIG. 24) started upon power-on, a main process (S1200 in FIG. 27) executed after the start-up process, and a regular (this embodiment). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) started at a cycle of 2 milliseconds (FIG. 14) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 23) started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 24) and the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value is incremented by one to the upper limit value (109 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is incremented by 1 to the upper limit value (99 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the special symbol random number counter C1, the special symbol type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the special symbol random number counter C1, the special symbol type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum values (in this embodiment, , 109, 99, 100, 99), each is cleared to 0. When the special symbol random number counter C1 or the normal symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the special symbol random number counter C1 or the normal symbol random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the random number per symbol counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the random number counter for special symbol C1 or the random number counter for normal symbol C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the counter of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol change process for setting a special symbol (third symbol) change pattern and the like by the process for displaying the special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol (third symbol) by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). ). Next, a distribution prize process associated with a ball entering the distribution prize device 64 is executed (S105), and a distribution discharge process associated with the discharge of game balls from the distribution prize device 64 is executed (S106). Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (S107). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, the details of the distribution winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, and the details of the distribution discharge process (S106) will be described. The details of the start winning process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S107), a normal symbol variation process, which is a variation process of a normal symbol in response to a game ball passing through the normal symbol startup opening 67, is executed (S108). Is executed for the passing of the game ball (S109). The details of the ordinary symbol change process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the through gate process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for performing control relating to launching of a game ball is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S110) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. Then, when the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  Next, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104) performs various determinations and determinations based on each counter value that has acquired the special symbol, and performs the first symbol display device 37 in the variable display mode determined by predetermined control. And the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously perform control to enable variable display (dynamic display) or stop display in a display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating a determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (S201). When it is determined that the big hit is being made (S201: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not being performed (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202).

  When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202, No), it is determined whether new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203). If it is determined that no new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), a special symbol change start process is executed (S204). After that, this processing ends.

  The special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204), which will be described later in detail, performs a jackpot determination and a change pattern selection process based on various data newly stored in the special symbol execution area 203a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S202: Yes), the change pattern (dynamic change display mode) in which the special symbol is changed and displayed (dynamic display) is set. It is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed (S205). If it is determined that the current time is before the fluctuation time (S205: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S104: Yes), the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S206).

  Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S207). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the range (S207: No), the process is terminated. In addition, in the present embodiment, all the fluctuations of the special symbols are the big hits, so that the process of determining whether or not this is a big hit may be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the current lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S207: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B (S208). Here, the big hit type is determined by the special hit type table 202b shown in FIG. 9 based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 that has been acquired. If it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit A, 100 is set in the counter 203d during the time reduction (S209). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is the big hit B, 0 is set to the counter 203d during the time reduction (S210). Various settings (for example, the number of rounds, etc.) related to the start of the jackpot game are set (S211). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, a special symbol change start process (S204), which is one of the special symbol change processes (FIG. 15, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S204).

  In the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204), first, a distribution device error notification control process is executed (S301). The distribution device error notification control process (S301) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 17, but based on the current value of the distribution prize ball counter 203e, the first to the first prize devices 64 of the distribution prize device 64 will be described. The positions of the eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined, and the positions are compared with the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. If it is determined that they do not match, an error notification process is executed. This is the process to perform.

  The data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is obtained (S302). Based on the special symbol per random number table 202a, a big hit determination is executed for the value of the obtained special symbol per random number counter C1 (S303). It is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination executed in the process of S303 is a big hit (S304). When the result of the determination is a big hit (S304: YES), a display mode (LED display mode) on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit is set (S305). A big hit change pattern for changing and displaying the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is selected (determined) (S306).

Here, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, a normal special fluctuation pattern, a ceiling fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, as a jackpot fluctuation pattern selected based on winning in the first starting opening 71. , A special ceiling variation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed, and a switching special variation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed with a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern. In addition, as a variation pattern selected based on winning the second starting port 300, a special time-saving variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the normal special fluctuation pattern is a left, middle, and right symbol (in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not in the variable display mode). , 1 to 9) are displayed in a loop (1 → 2 →... → 9 → 1) in ascending order at a high speed. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is established, and only the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed. In the reach state, the sound “reach” is output from the sound output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the character "Achievement of heaven!" Is displayed below the area of the third symbol display device 81 where the special symbol is displayed, and the player receives 256 balls. Has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, and a notification indicating that the gaming ball has won a prize is displayed in the first starting port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has hit a big hit. In the present embodiment, if the gaming ball wins in the first starting port 71, the gaming machine always wins a jackpot. Therefore, the player recognizes that the winning in the first starting port 71 results in a big hit. . Therefore, the player determines that the number of balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are to be won in the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 is directly connected to the jackpot. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 in the sorting prize winning device 64 has entered the sorting prize winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the character “Arrival at heaven!”. Can be recognized as a jackpot. Note that the change time of the special change pattern is usually set to 15 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the gaming ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the special symbol variation display is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, as shown in FIG. , The pseudo symbol displayed at the upper left is replaced as it is as a special symbol, and a diagram in which the closed door is opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11B, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message “Arrived in heaven!” Is displayed below the special symbol. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. The ceiling special fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

  Note that the ceiling change pattern is the same time as the time required for the game ball to enter the first starting port 71 after entering the ball entry port 640 of the sorting prize device 64 (the time set at the time of design). The fluctuation time is set. Therefore, after the display of the fluctuation of the ceiling fluctuation pattern is started and the fluctuation time ends, the game ball will be awarded to the first starting port 71, so that the replacement with the special symbol is smoothly performed, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the change is a pseudo symbol change or a special symbol change, and can expect a big hit even with the pseudo symbol change display.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the switching special fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 12 when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern. In this way, the pseudo-design which has been displayed in a fluctuating manner disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. After that, the same special symbol on the left and right is displayed in the “reach state” in which the display is stopped, and the character “Arrival at heaven!” Is displayed. After that, the game is stopped and displayed with a special symbol of “777” to notify the player that the big hit has occurred. Note that the switching special fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling variation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a case of a jackpot, and even if the player does not have the ceiling variation pattern, the player has an expectation for the jackpot. Can be made. In addition, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give freshness and to pay attention to the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  The time-saving special fluctuation pattern is constituted by a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds, and is displayed in a state where predetermined symbols (for example, “777” or the like) are aligned with a double-eye pattern to notify that a big hit has occurred. Has become. With this configuration, the game time in the time-saving game state can be shortened, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early because the big hit occurs at short intervals. In addition, the game store can shorten the time during which the game balls are not consumed during the time-saving game, thereby increasing the sales.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination in step S303 is incorrect (S304: No), a determination error notification command is set (S307). In this embodiment, since the value is determined to be a hit for all the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol, if it is determined that the game machine is out of place, the gaming machine is illegally remodeled, Since the malfunction is considered, it is possible to notify the gaming machine of the abnormality of the gaming machine by setting the determination error notification command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the determination error notification command, an error process is performed so that a display indicating an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a character such as “determination error”).

  A variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is generated (S308). A stop type command is set (S309). In the present embodiment, only the jackpot stop type command is set as the stop type command.

  Next, the distribution device error notification control process (S301), which is one process of the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the distribution device error notification control process (S301).

  Based on the position of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 and the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e, it is checked whether the data is the same as the data set in the distribution role object position data 202i (S401). Here, the data set in the sorting role object position data 202i is compared with data corresponding to three values before and after the value of the sorting winning ball count counter 203e, and a process of checking whether the data is the same as any one is performed. Execute. Thereby, when there is a game ball remaining in the distribution prize device 64 (flowing down in the distribution prize device 64), the remaining game ball moves the distribution rotation member 64a1. In such a case, the position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 in the distribution role object position data 202i corresponding to three times before and after is also determined from the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. Thus, even in a normal game (a game in which a fraud or the like is not performed), a problem of notifying an error can be suppressed.

  If it is determined that the collation results do not match (S401: No), an error notification command is set (S408). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, the error notification command for display is set, and a display indicating an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the character of “character position error” is displayed). On the other hand, when it is determined that the matching results match (S401: No), the process of S402 is executed. Note that, in each of the processes from S402 to S408, as in the process in S401, the process of checking whether there is an abnormality at the positions of the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 is executed. The collation process is the same as that of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, the sorting device error notification control process (S301 in FIG. 17) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , May be configured to be executed only when the first starting port 71 is won. By configuring in this way, when the second starting port 300 is won, the control processing can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of collating the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is executed, but only the position of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is determined by the distribution winning prize ball number counter 203e. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the data corresponding to the sorting role object position data 202i corresponding to 0 (in the present embodiment, “0” indicating that the second storage unit 64d8 is facing upward). You may comprise.

  With such a configuration, after the game ball is guided to the first starting port 71 (the eighth guide path 64z16), the second accommodation portion 64d8 is in a state of being directed upward. By checking only that state, it can be easily determined whether the game ball has been normally guided to the first starting port 71 via the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8. Further, even if there is a game ball subsequently won in the distribution prize winning device 64, a large number of game balls need to be entered before the game ball reaches the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. The position of the distribution rotation member 64a8 can be determined and determined. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not fraud has been performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the error notification processing is executed when the collation does not match. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a processing for invalidating the jackpot may be executed, or the sound may be notified by voice or the like. Alternatively, a signal may be output to a hall computer or the like so that the player cannot identify it. With this configuration, the game store can recognize and respond to the notification of the fraud earlier. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the position of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is configured to be detected one by one. However, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined. It is configured to detect at one time, and the detected data ("10101010" indicating the position of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when 256 game balls enter when normal) ) And the initial position data 202h or the position data corresponding to 0 (256) of the distribution role position data 202i. With this configuration, it is possible to more easily check whether the position is normal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a description will be given of a distribution prize process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process (S105). In the sorting prize processing (S105 in FIG. 18), the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 64 is counted, and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the number of entered balls. A process for generating a distribution winning ball count command is executed. Hereinafter, the distribution winning process (S105 in FIG. 18) will be described.

  In the distribution prize processing (S105 in FIG. 18), first, it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize apparatus 64 (S501). If it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S501: Yes), the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e is acquired (S502). The value of the acquired winning prize ball number counter 203e is updated by adding 1, and the updated value is stored in the prize winning ball number counter 203e (S503). When the value of the acquired winning prize ball counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, adding 1 updates the initial value to 0. A distribution prize ball number command indicating the updated value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e is set (generated) (S504). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the entrance 640 (S501: No), the process is terminated.

  It is determined whether the value of the updated winning prize ball number counter 203e is a set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255) (S505). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first starting port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S505: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0. That is, the measurement start is set to the time from when the game ball that enters the first starting port 71 enters the first entry port 640 until the game ball enters the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S507). After that, this processing ends.

  With this configuration, the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 64 can be accurately determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The number of balls can be recognized, and an effect based on the number of game balls that have won the distribution prize device 64 can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the distribution discharge processing (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the distribution discharge processing (S106). The sorting discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) is a process for counting the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Be executed. Hereinafter, the distribution discharging process (FIG. 19, S106) will be described.

  In the distribution discharging process (FIG. 19, S106), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 (S601). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8 (S601: Yes), the distribution ball number counter 203f is acquired (S602). The value of the obtained number-of-discharged-balls counter 203f is updated by adding 1 to the value, and the updated value is stored in the number-of-discharged-balls counter 203f (S603). Note that the acquired value of the sorted discharge ball counter 203f is 255, and is updated to 0 when added and updated. A distributed discharge ball number command is set (generated) to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f (S604).

  As described above, by counting the number of game balls ejected from the sorting prize winning device 64 and checking the number of the game balls with the value of the sorting winning prize ball counter 203e, the game that has been illegally entered into the sorting prize winning device 64 is determined. It is possible to monitor whether there is a ball (for example, a game ball is introduced from any one of the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the start winning process (S107), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S107). The starting winning process (S107 in FIG. 20) is to determine whether a game ball has won the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, and if a winning has been achieved, the special symbol is fluctuated and stopped. A process of storing the acquired data such as the various counter values in the symbol execution area is executed. In addition, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, the flowing time of the game ball winning in the first starting port 71 after the game ball wins the distribution prize device 64 (in the present embodiment, (5 to 7 seconds), and if it is outside the set value, error processing is executed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 71 (start winning) (S701). Here, the winning in the first starting port 71 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 71 (there is a start winning) (S701: Yes), it is determined whether the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S702). When the distribution prize flag 203h is determined to be off (S702: No), a prize prize error notifying the audio lamp controller 113 that there is an abnormal prize in the first starting port 71. A command is set (generated) (S703). Here, the distribution prize flag 223h is a flag that is set to ON when the 256th game ball that will win the first starting port 71 in the distribution prize device 64 has entered. If the distribution prize flag 203h is off despite the determination that the game ball has won the first starting port 71, it is possible that the first starting port 71 has been incorrectly won. Perform error handling. Thereby, even when the sensor or the like of the first starting port 71 is turned on by an electromagnetic wave or the like from the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to detect the injustice and prevent the illegal jackpot from being obtained. .

  The distribution winning flag 203h is set to off (S704). It is determined whether the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is within a set value (5 seconds to 7 seconds in the present embodiment) (S705). In the present embodiment, the time required from passing through the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 to winning the first starting port 71 is designed to be 6 seconds. Therefore, by setting 1 second before and after as a set value, and setting 5 seconds to 7 seconds as a set value, in the case where an illegal operation is performed such that a piano wire or the like is wrapped around a game ball to reach the first starting port 71 illegally. Can detect fraud if the time required to reach the first starting port 71 is outside the set value.

  When it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is out of the set value (S705: No), the process of S703 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is within the set value (S705: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S706). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S706: Yes), the process of S703 is executed. Here, when a special ball is fluctuated by a game ball winning in the first starting port 71, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is usually the longest fluctuation pattern. Before the elapse of 10 seconds, it is usually impossible to win the first starting port 71 next. Therefore, if it is determined that the first starting port 71 has won while the special symbol is changing, By setting the winning error command, the gaming shop can recognize early that the gaming machine has an abnormality. Therefore, even if the first starting port 71 is awarded consecutively fraudulently, the gaming store side recognizes the fraudulently at an early stage, thereby reducing damage caused by the fraud.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S706: No), each value of the special symbol random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S707). When it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 71 (S701: No), the processing of S708 is executed.

  It is determined whether the game ball has won the second starting port 300 (S708). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 300 (S708: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 300 (S708: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S709). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S709), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S709: No), the values of the special symbol random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S710).

  As described above, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 71, whether or not the winning is a regular winning is determined based on the history of the winning in the sorting winning device 64 (the sorting winning flag 203h is on). Or not), the flow time of the winning game ball (the value of the distribution winning timer 203g), and whether the special symbol is fluctuating. If at least one does not match, a new counter value is newly added. By executing the error processing for setting the winning error command without acquiring the data of the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the illegal jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, it is difficult to allow the game balls to win the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 at the same time. Further, if a game ball wins simultaneously in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, the first starting port 71 is given priority. The game ball that has won the second starting port 300 is processed as an invalid ball while the special symbol is being changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S108). The normal symbol variation process (S108) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S801). The hitting of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the hit indicating is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 to when the opening / closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the normal electric accessory is performed. . When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S803). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S822 described later before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. Regardless of the time-saving game state and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set to a fluctuation time of 3 seconds for both the hit fluctuation pattern and the off fluctuation pattern.

  In the processing of S803, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S803 that the variation time of the ordinary symbol that has been variation displayed has elapsed (S803: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S804). . In the process of S804, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S817, the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S821, the “X” symbol is displayed as the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, and the stop symbol is displayed (lighting). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S804, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is set to the second symbol in the display mode set in the processes of S817 and S821. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S805). If it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols is a win (S805: Yes), the opening and closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set (806). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols this time is out of order (S805: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S802 that the ordinary symbol is not in the variable display mode (S802: No), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c (the number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol M) is acquired. (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S808). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S808: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S808: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S809).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S810). In the process of S810, the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area is obtained (S811).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203d during the working hours is 1 or more (that is, whether it is not 0) (S812). If it is determined that the value of the counter 203d during the time reduction is 0 (that is, it is not during the time reduction) (S812: No), the random number table 202c per normal symbol for non-time reduction (normal game state) (see FIG. 8C ) Is obtained based on the hit determination value (S1013) On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during the time reduction) (S812: Yes). It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S814) .If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S814: Yes), the process of S813 is executed. If it is determined that it is not in the middle (S814: No), it is determined based on the hit determination value of the random number per normal symbol table 202c (FIG. 8C) for the time saving (time saving gaming state). Result is obtained (S815).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S816). If it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S816: Yes), a display mode of “○” which is a display mode at the time of a hit is set (S817). The opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S820). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, the symbol is off) (S816: No), the display mode of “x” which is the display mode at the time of the off is set. Is performed (S819). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S822).

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S109). This through gate passage processing (S109) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, and when a game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per symbol.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 22, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S901). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not If it is not less than 4 (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the random number counter per normal symbol C4 acquired in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is set to the first of the empty reserved areas (normal symbol reserved 1 to ordinary symbol retained 4) in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S905). In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S910). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 24), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If the switch is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5) is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). (S1005: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1112 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 5). Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 5) is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014).

  A distribution position initialization process is executed (S1015). The details of the distribution position initialization process (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. However, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64 are determined in advance. This is a process for setting an initial value. After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1010). After that, the interruption is permitted (S1011). Then, the processing shifts to a main processing (S1200 in FIG. 27) described later.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is in an initialized state when the power is turned on until the main control device 110 outputs a sorting winning ball count command or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the process of S1010 of the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the information backed up by the main control device 110 (for example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e) ) May be output as a backup command so that the audio lamp control device 113 backs up the MPU 221. With this configuration, the data and the like can be backed up to the state immediately before the power is turned off for the audio lamp control device 113 as well.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the distribution position initialization process (S1015), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are flowcharts showing the distribution position initialization processing (S1015).

  In the distribution position initialization processing (S1015 in FIGS. 25 and 26), first, the position of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is acquired from the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 (S1101). Here, the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and is not only the first distribution rotation member 64a1 but also the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2. The rotation angle of each of the rotation angles 64a8 to 64a8 can be detected. The rotation angle is set to have a positive value when the first storage portions 64c1 to 64c8 face upward, and to have a negative value when the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 face upward. Note that if the acquired value is a positive value, “1” is acquired, and if the acquired value is a negative value, “0” is acquired.

  The value acquired in the process of S1101 is the initial position data of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 stored in the distribution initial position data 202h (in the present embodiment, it indicates that the first storage unit 64c1 is facing upward. It is determined whether the value is the same as "1") (S1102). If it is determined that the obtained value is the same as the initial position data (S1102: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired value is different from the initial position data (S1102: No), the initial position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 stored in the distribution initial position data 202h (this embodiment Then, the distribution position adjustment motor 263 is set according to “10101010”) (S1103). In the present embodiment, the distribution position adjusting motor 263 is set so as to rotate the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rightward by a predetermined angle (in this embodiment, a position of plus 90 degrees).

  In the processing of S1104 to S1124, the initial positions of the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 are set similarly to the first distribution rotation member 64a1. Note that the initial position of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 is a position of minus 90 degrees where the second storage portion 64d2 faces upward, and the initial position of the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is the first storage portion 64c3. Is a plus 90 degree position, which is a position facing upward, the initial position of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is a minus 90 degree position, which is a position where the second storage portion 64d4 is upward, and the fifth distribution rotation. The initial position of the member 64a5 is a position of plus 90 degrees where the first accommodation portion 64c5 faces upward, and the initial position of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is a position where the second accommodation portion 64d6 faces upward. A certain minus 90 degree position, an initial position of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is a plus 90 degree position where the first accommodation portion 64c7 is directed upward, and an initial position of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is 64d of 2nd accommodation part There are respectively set to the position of minus 90 degrees is a position facing upwards. The method of setting is the same as that of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated), the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are set to predetermined initial positions, respectively. Thereby, the gaming shop changes the state of the sorting prize winning device 64 to a state in which the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e containing no game ball is 0 (first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8). Is set to a position where game balls are guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15), the RAM erase switch 122 is operated to execute initialization of the RAM 203. , The distribution winning device 64 can also be automatically set to the initial state. Therefore, when a game store is opened, a plurality of gaming machines can be easily set to the same state (the same value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e).

  In the present embodiment, the initial position of the sorting prize winning device 64 is such that the winning ball number counter 203e in which no game ball has entered the sorting prize winning device 64 is 0. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The value of the number counter 203e is set to 255 (the position where the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game ball to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16), and immediately the first The starting port 71 may be configured to receive a prize to set a jackpot. With such a configuration, the gaming machine side can prepare a gaming machine to which a jackpot is immediately provided, and it is possible to attract a large number of customers who come to the store in search of such a gaming machine at the time of opening the store. It is possible to increase the number of customers coming to the store from the time of opening. It should be noted that the state of the sorting prize winning device 64 may be appropriately set by the game store using a switch or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the position of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is confirmed and the process of setting the initial value is performed. May be configured to forcibly set the distribution rotation member to an initial value. As described above, the initial setting process can be simplified by collectively performing the initial setting process regardless of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Therefore, the processing at power-on can be shortened.

  Next, a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process (FIG. 24) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), a process of updating a counter, a process of turning off the power, and a process of monitoring an abnormal prize to the distribution prize device 64 are roughly performed.

  In the main processing (S1200 in FIG. 27), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-sides. An external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  The prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1202, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, execution of various effects according to the big hit, a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. (S1203) A power jacking control process for controlling the opening and closing of the blades 300a and 300b of the motorized accessory attached to the second starting port 300 is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1204), the opening time of the electric accessory is usually set, and the opening time of the electric accessory is set. When the number of times of opening is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, a display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1205). The display control processing of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “例 え ば” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1206). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing the ball, and the second symbol display device 83 Thus, the variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the random number counter C4 per symbol, and when the second symbol is hit, the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory are opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, distribution error processing is executed (S1207). The distribution error processing (S1207) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 28. However, the difference between the game ball that has won the distribution prize device 64 and the game ball that has discharged is an abnormal set value (in this embodiment, In the case where the 256th game ball has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, the flowing time of the game ball is equal to or longer than the average number of seconds reached by the first starting port 71 (this embodiment). In the embodiment, a process of determining whether an abnormality has occurred is performed by determining whether or not it has elapsed (7 seconds or more).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes from S1201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1209: No), the initial time is maintained until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The update of the value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed (S1210).

  Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109, 99 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the main processing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the random number counter per special symbol) The initial value of C1 (the initial value of the random number counter C4 per symbol) can be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1208, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 23 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1211), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1208 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1201 to S1207, or at the end of one cycle of the process of S1210 performed within the remaining time. ing. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (FIG. 24, S1001) When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing in S1201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the distribution error process (S1207), which is one of the main processes (S1200 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing (S1207).

  In the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207), first, the value of the distribution ball number counter 203f is subtracted from the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e to be equal to or larger than the abnormal set value (in the present embodiment, 10 or more). ) Is determined (S1301). Note that the subtraction here is an operation for calculating the number of difference balls between the entered game ball and the discharged game ball. For example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 3, and the distribution is If the value of the discharged ball counter 203f is 254, the result of the subtraction is calculated as 5. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the sorting prize winning device 64 is 9 if it is a design value, and if it is larger than that, the ball is entered without passing through the entrance 640 (for example, the first ball). To allow the game ball to enter from any one of the eighth to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

  When it is determined that the difference between the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution ball counter 203f is equal to or larger than the abnormal set value (S1301: Yes), an error notification command is set (generated) (S1302). . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, it generates a display command for displaying a display mode (for example, a character such as “character abnormal winning error”) on the third symbol display device 81 indicating an abnormality.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference between the sorting prize ball number counter 203e and the sorting discharge sphere number counter 203f is less than the abnormal set value (S1301: No), the sorting prize flag 203h is set to ON. It is determined whether it is (S1303). If it is determined that the distribution prize flag 203h is set to off (S1303: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution prize flag 203h is set to ON (S1303: Yes), the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is acquired. One is added to the value of the obtained distribution winning timer 203g (S1305).

  It is determined whether the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is a value indicating the average number of seconds to reach (in transliteration mode, 7 seconds or more) (S1306). If it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is equal to or longer than the average number of seconds to reach (S1306: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1307). Note that the processing in S1307 is similar to the processing in S1302. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sorting prize timer 203g is less than the arrival average number of seconds (S1306: No), the process ends.

  In this way, the distribution error process (S1207 in FIG. 28) is executed at intervals of 4 ms, and it is determined whether or not the distribution prize device 64 has an abnormality. As soon as it is determined that a game ball exceeding the design value has entered the sorting winning device 64 (there is a difference between the number of entered balls and the number of ejected balls), error processing can be executed. Therefore, fraud and abnormalities of the pachinko machine 10 can be found at an early stage. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be further reduced.

  Further, when it is determined that the number of game balls (256 in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are to be won in the first starting port 71 in the distribution prize device 64 has been entered, the game is executed. Since the time until the ball reaches the first starting port 71 is configured to be monitored, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is always compared with the case where the flow time of the entered game ball is monitored. Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the number of cases where the difference between the number of balls hit and the number of balls discharged to the sorting prize winning device 64 is determined to be abnormal is set to a preset value, but is not limited thereto and can be set by the game store. A configuration in which a setting switch or the like is provided may be employed. With this configuration, it can be adjusted and set in accordance with a change in the ratio of the game balls entering the distribution prize device 64 (frequency of entry) due to adjustment of the game nail or the like. Therefore, the abnormality can be monitored with the abnormality set value that is more suited to the state of the pachinko machine 10, and the abnormality can be accurately detected.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process (S1600) executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process (FIG. 29) is executed, first, an initial setting process upon power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1619 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1616 in FIG. 30), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1619. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1619 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1619 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure and after the execution of the power-off process in S1619 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, since the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S169, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1506). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1619 (see S1618 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1619 is executed, the process of S1508 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1619 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1508 is performed through steps S1504 to S1506. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510).

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1509 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1504 to S1508 via the process of S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1504. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1600). When the main processing (S1600) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing (S1600) was started or since the previous processing of S1601 was executed (S1600). (S1601) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The processes in S1602 to S1610 are related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1611 and the command determination processing in S1614 in a short cycle. By performing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform setting related to the variable display effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process, and by performing the process of S1614 in a short cycle, Omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110 can be prevented.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1609 described later (S1603), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1604). . The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. Sent to 114. In the held number display update process (S1606), a process of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of the sub-order rearrangement held storage area 223k will be described in detail later. .

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of S1611. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1610), a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1611, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting processing (S1611), the pseudo fluctuation processing is executed (S1612). The pseudo fluctuation processing (S1612) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but a pseudo fluctuation pattern (pseudo dynamic display) of a pseudo symbol to be displayed in a fluctuation (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81. Is determined, and a process of generating a pseudo fluctuation pattern for display indicating the determined fluctuation pattern is executed.

  After the pseudo fluctuation processing (S1612), the background selection processing is executed (S1613). This background selection processing (S1613) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 35, but it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied. In the case of changing the background image, a process for determining the type of the background image to be changed is executed.

  A command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S1614). Details of the command determination processing (S1614) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1614 ends, processing of updating each counter that adds 1 to the counter value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed (S1615). It is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1618), and the power-off processing is executed (S1619). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1620), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The storage of the information on the occurrence of power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1617), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1617: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process (S1600) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1617: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing (S1600) is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, for convenience of description, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described first with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (S1600 in FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. I do. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S1614) will be described.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from main controller 110 (S1701). Here, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation display mode for varyingly displaying a special symbol. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1702). The type (type) of the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1703). The type of the variation pattern extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) described later. This is used when setting a special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the special symbol variation display effect and the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON when the stop type command has been received. When the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON. (S1705). The type of stop (either big hit A or big hit B) is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is determined whether or not a distribution winning prize ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). If it is determined that the distributed prize ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the number of prize balls indicated by the received distributed prize ball number command is extracted, and a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the extracted value is used as a subordinate. It is stored (stored) in the minute winning ball counter 223d (S1708). Here, if the value of the sorting winning ball counter 223d is 0, subtracting 1 gives 255. The value of the in-prize prize counter 223f is acquired, the value is updated by adding 1 to the value, and stored in the in-prize prize counter 223f (S1709).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distributed prize ball number command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1707: No), it is determined whether the distributed sphere number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707: No). S1710). If it is determined that the command of the number of discharged balls is received from the main controller 110 (S1710: Yes), the number of discharged balls is extracted from the received command of number of discharged balls and the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the command is used. It is stored in the distribution ball number counter 223e (S1711). Here, if the command of the number of sorted and discharged balls is a command indicating 0, subtracting 1 results in 255. The value of the during-prize-winning counter 223f is acquired, and a value updated by subtracting 1 from the value is stored in the under-prize-winning counter 223f (S1712).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sorting and ejection ball count command has not been received (S1710: No), it is determined whether an error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713). When it is determined that the error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713: Yes), the display error notification command is set (generated) (S1714). The error notification command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the contents of the error in characters based on the type of the error notification command output by the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no error notification command has been received (S1713: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S1715). When it is determined that the ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S1715: Yes), the ending setting process is executed (S1717). The ending setting process (S1717) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 32, but is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the executed jackpot game (either the jackpot A or the jackpot B). A process of setting an ending screen to be performed is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received from main controller 110 (S1716: No), a process according to another command is executed (S1716).

  Next, an ending setting process (S1719), which is a process of the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1719).

  In the ending setting process (FIG. 32, S1719), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot being executed is the jackpot A (shift to the time-saving gaming state after the 16R jackpot) (S1801). When it is determined that the running big hit is the big hit A (S1801: Yes), the time-saving effect display (FIG. 13A) is set as the ending effect display mode (ending image) (S1802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is the jackpot B (shift to the normal game state after the 16R jackpot) (S1801: No), the display mode of the ending effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Then, the normal effect display (FIG. 13B) is set (S1803). The display ending command indicating the set ending effect is set (generated).

  In the time reduction effect display, as shown in FIG. 13A, a character “Entering Makai Mode” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the time saving game state is notified by the name of the Makai mode, and the player is notified of the time saving game state. In addition, in the normal effect display, as shown in FIG. 13B, the character “entering the heavenly challenge mode” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the normal game state (non-time saving game state) is notified by the name of the heavenly challenge mode. The player recognizes that the heavenly challenge mode will be shifted to a game in which the distribution prize device 64 enters a ball until the game ball is awarded in the first starting port 71 (in a game effect, the player reaches the heavens).

  In the present embodiment, the player determines for the first time whether the executed jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B based on the display mode of the ending. As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot being executed is not the jackpot A until just before the jackpot ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1611), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 30, performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1611).

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223b is off (S1901: No), the process of S1909 is executed because the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223b is on (S1901: Yes), the change start flag 223b is set to off (S1902).

  In the third symbol display device 81, it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped and displayed (S1903: No), the fluctuation in the fluctuation display effect of the special symbol extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1703 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614). The pattern is obtained from the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 (S1904).

  On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S1903: Yes), the pseudo symbol variation pattern of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is as follows. It is determined whether the pattern is a ceiling variation pattern (S1905). When it is determined that the pseudo variation pattern displayed variably on the third symbol display device 81 is the ceiling variation pattern (S1905: Yes), a special ceiling variation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1906). On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation pattern displayed variably on the third symbol display device 81 is not the ceiling fluctuation pattern (S1905: No), the switching special fluctuation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1907). A display variation pattern command corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is set (generated) (S1908).

  It is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON (S1909). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is off (S1909: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1909: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off (S1910).

  In the processing of S1706 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614), the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set (S1911). A display stop type command corresponding to the set stop type is set (S1912).

  As described above, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, if the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a variable manner, the pseudo pattern is replaced with the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the special ceiling variation pattern or the switching special variation pattern is selected. Thereby, the display mode of the special symbol can be matched with the display mode linked to the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the fluctuating display with the pseudo symbol and the fluctuating display with the special symbol, and it is possible to expect the big hit even with the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a description will be given of the pseudo-variation process (S1612), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 30, performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113). FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pseudo fluctuation processing (S1612). The pseudo fluctuation process (FIG. 34, S1612) is a process for determining a fluctuation pattern of a pseudo symbol to be displayed in a fluctuation manner on the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, the pseudo fluctuation processing (FIG. 34, S1612) will be described.

  In the pseudo fluctuation process (FIG. 34, S1612), first, it is determined whether the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol in a variable display (S2001). When it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S2001: Yes), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2001: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2002). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S2002: Yes), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2002: No), it is determined in the processing of S1707 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614) that the distribution winning prize ball number command has been received. It is determined whether it is (S2003). When it is determined that the distribution winning ball count command has been received (S2003: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is obtained (S2004). Based on the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d acquired in the processing of S2004, the pseudo fluctuation pattern is selected (determined) from the pseudo fluctuation table 222e (see FIG. 10A). (S2005). A pseudo fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (generated) (S2006). On the other hand, if it is determined that the sorting winning ball count command has not been received (S2003: No), this processing ends.

  As described above, when the special symbol and the pseudo symbol are not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the distribution winning prize ball number command is received (that is, the game is inserted into the entrance 640 of the distribution winning prize device 64). When the ball has entered), the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbol is selected, and the start of the pseudo-variation display of the pseudo symbol is set. Therefore, the player feels as if the lottery game has started as if the game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64, and the fluctuation display of the pseudo symbol is changed to the special symbol fluctuation display. It feels as if it is, and you can see the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol with the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, even if the player is skilled in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is determined by the ratio of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern to be selected (selection) based on the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d. Are set so as to be different from each other, the number of game balls that have won the current distribution prize device 64 can be predicted based on the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected and its frequency. Therefore, even if the player knows that the fluctuation is a pseudo symbol, the player can obtain more important information related to the jackpot than the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, and is more interested in the display of the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol. You can play games.

  Next, the background selection process (S1613), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 30, performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the background selection processing (S1613). The background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) determines whether to change the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and executes the process of determining the background image to be changed. Hereinafter, the background selection processing (FIG. 35, S1613) will be described.

  In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613), first, the value of the during-prize-winning counter 223f is larger than 3, that is, the number of game balls entering (remaining) in the distribution prize device 64. Is determined to be four or more (S2101). When it is determined that the number of game balls entering the sorting prize winning device 64 is four or more (S2101: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is obtained (S2102). A background pattern is selected from the background selection table 222f (see FIG. 10B) based on the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d acquired in the process of S2102 (S2103). . A display background command corresponding to the selected background pattern is set (generated) (S2104). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-prize-winning counter 223f is 3 or less (S2101: No), the process ends.

  As described above, when the number of game balls entering the sorting prize winning device 64 is four or more, the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be changed. At an appropriate timing, the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. The selected background image is the percentage of the type of the background image selected by the number of game balls (the value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d) that has entered the distribution prize device 64 (the selected background image). Is set to be changed, the background image to be selected is a hint for the player to predict the number of balls in the distribution prize device 64 for the player. Can be interested.

  In addition, the background image selected when the 256th game ball that will win the first starting port 71 enters the sorting winning device 64 is limited to the precursor C background (FIG. 13C). Therefore, when the precursor C background is selected, it can be expected that the first starting port 71 will be won. Therefore, the player can be interested in the background image in addition to the jackpot, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  As described above, a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) of game balls wins in the distribution prize device 64, so that a big hit is always given to the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the damage to the player from becoming excessively large.

  Further, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the player may be bored with the game before a predetermined number of the prize wins in the sorting prize winning device 64, but a pseudo symbol configured in a display mode similar to the special symbol is concerned. By causing the distribution prize device 64 to start the variation display at the timing when the game ball enters, the player can enjoy the variation display of the pseudo symbol as if the variation of the special symbol had started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, when a game is started by another person or at the time of opening a store, it is not possible to determine how many game balls are in the sorting prize winning device 64, but the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is not changed. The frequency (ratio) of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected based on the number of game balls (the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d) that has entered the winning prize device 64 is set to be changed. Therefore, it is possible to predict the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64 from the type of the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the variable display of the pseudo symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), the jackpot does not occur until a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) enters the sorting prize winning device 64. When the game state is reached, the ball can enter the second starting port 300 and the jackpot is provided to the player early, so that the sense of speed until the big hit between the normal game state and the time-saving game state is obtained. By making the difference greatly, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with a stronger desire to shift to the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. In addition, it is possible for the player to enjoy a game type that is significantly different between the normal game state and the time reduction game state.

  In addition, the configuration is such that a big hit is achieved by winning the first starting port 71. However, when the first starting port 71 is won, after the ball enters the entrance port 640 of the sorting winning device 64, By judging whether the arrival time before winning the first starting port 71 is appropriate or the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are appropriate, a jackpot due to fraud is determined. It can be suppressed from being given. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is counted to count the number of entries (the number of entries to the ceiling) required to win the first starting port 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made based on the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform the process of counting the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640, so that the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, after the distribution rotation member guides the game ball, it returns to the position before the guide (for example, after the game ball is received by guiding the game ball in a state where the first storage unit is facing upward). The first accommodating portion is directed upward again due to too strong momentum or the vibration of the pachinko machine 10). The problem that the state (position) shifts can be suppressed, and the number of incoming balls required to reach the first starting port 71 can be determined based on the current position of the distribution rotation member.

  Further, the count value of the entrance 640 and the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are collated at fixed intervals or the like, and the count values are collated and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a1. The correction may be made based on the position of 64a8. In such a case, if the collation result is corrected differently for a predetermined number of times or more, an error notification is issued, and the amusement shop side can confirm whether improper operation has been performed or a malfunction has occurred due to a failure. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the count value of the entrance 640 and the states of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 can be accurately matched, and accurate control of production and the like can be performed. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are configured with eight distribution rotation members, each position can be indicated by 1-bit data, and a total of 8 bits can be represented. Since data can be configured, data can be easily transmitted and received.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the number of balls to be entered into the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64, and a game ball is entered into the first starting port 71. A case has been described in which, when a jackpot is reached, a game ball is fired toward the specific winning port 65a in the right area of the game area where the game ball does not easily enter the distribution winning device 64.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the sorting winning device 64, and when a big hit occurs, the game ball enters the sorting winning device 64 during the big hit. Configuration. In addition, depending on the jackpot type, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are set at predetermined positions by lottery after the jackpot game, whereby the sorting winning device 64 after the jackpot game is set. The number of balls required to win the first starting port 71 is variably set. In addition, the sorting prize winning device 64 is usually provided with two motorized accessories, and differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when each is opened, a game ball is guided to a predetermined sorting rotating member. I do.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the second symbol display device 83 is provided with a display unit for displaying the result of determining whether or not the first ordinary symbol is correct, with "O" and "X" arranged side by side. Below this, display sections for displaying the result of the determination of the success / failure of the second ordinary symbol are provided side by side with “O” and “X”. In addition, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the game balls that have won the first ordinary symbol opening 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol opening 67s2. A display unit that indicates the number of reserved balls, which is a number, by a lighting state is set.

  The variable prize device 65 provided at the lower right side of the game area is provided at the upper left of the distribution prize device 64 at the center of the game area. At the lower right side of the game area, a general winning opening 63 is arranged. On the right side surface of the sorting prize winning device 64, a first blade 64s1 of a first ordinary electric accessory, which is an ordinary electric accessory, and a second blade 64s2 of a second ordinary electric accessory, are provided.

  In the normal game state (a game state other than the big hit game state), the player rotates the operation handle 51 to the right to the maximum to fire the game ball with the maximum firing force, thereby forming the right game area ( The game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80). Then, the game ball is fired so that the game ball enters the first normal symbol start port 67s1, the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and the entrance 640. On the other hand, when the big hitting game state is reached, the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the left game area (left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39, during the big hit game, the variable prize device 65 rotates the opening / closing plate downward to the front side for a predetermined period so that the game ball flowing down the game area is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Upon receipt, the user is guided to the specific winning opening 65a. When the opening / closing plate is pivoted downward, its rotation is regulated slightly more than 90 degrees on the specific winning opening 65a side (about 85 to 88 degrees), and the opening / closing plate is inclined in the direction of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the shape of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate has a tapered surface 65 s inclined toward the right end, and the game ball falling on the tapered surface is guided to the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64. It is configured to:

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is more likely to enter the entrance 640 of the sorting prize device 64 than in the normal game state (game state other than the jackpot game). Therefore, when the 256th game ball enters the distribution prize device 64 and wins at the first starting port 71 and a jackpot is won, the game ball is supplied to the distribution prize device 64 while playing a jackpot game. By making the ball enter, after the jackpot game, the game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 64 to some extent, and the remaining number of balls up to the 256th ball can be reduced. Therefore, the next hit can be given to the player at an early stage.

  In addition, by slightly firing the game balls, the game balls can be adjusted so that the game balls hardly fall on the tapered surface 65s (the game balls flow near the left side of the variable prize device 65). When it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the payout device 64 approaches 256, which is to win the first starting port 71, the firing force of the game balls is reduced by adjusting the operation handle 51 by adjusting the operation handle 51. When 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64 during the jackpot, and the first starting port 71 receives a prize during the jackpot game, the prize to the first starting port 71 becomes an invalid ball. This is a configuration that can prevent such a situation. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the judgment of the player and the game method, so that the player can concentrate on playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In addition, by setting the jackpot to be performed consecutively at the upper limit (for example, 5 times), it is possible to set so that the firing of the game ball cannot be weakly adjusted, and the first starting port 71 can be intentionally awarded during the jackpot. May be configured. By doing so, an upper limit can be set for the number of consecutive jackpots, and it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the distribution winning device 64 has a first blade 64s1 provided diagonally above the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 on the right side, and a second blade 64s1 diagonally above the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Each of the blades 64s2 is provided. Each of the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees around the lower end portion of the distribution winning device 64 by a solenoid. The first blade 64s1 is configured to always stand vertically and close the first normal ball entrance 640s1 through which a game ball formed on the right side of the sorting prize device 64 can pass, and the first normal When the symbol hits, the game ball is rotated about 45 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the first normal entrance. Further, the second blade 64s2 is configured similarly to the first blade 64s1. Each of the first normal ball entrance 640s1 and the second normal ball entrance 640s2 is constituted by a gate type sensor capable of detecting that a game ball has passed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 38, a game in which the first blade 64s1 rotates and enters the first ordinary entrance 640s1 inside the distribution winning device 64, as shown in FIG. A first ordinary guidance path 64m1 for guiding the ball to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is provided. The first normal taxiway 64m1 is formed of a wall protruding toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and forms a taxiway on which a game ball can roll. A fifth facing member 64t5 is provided above the first normal taxiway 64m1 so as to form a width that allows a game ball to pass between the first normal taxiway 64m1 and the first normal taxiway 64m1. Even if the momentum of the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 is strong, it collides with the fifth facing member 64t5, and further, the game ball flows down in the direction of the sixth discharge port 650a6 without being guided by the fifth facing member 64t5. Also, the game is guided to the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 by the first ordinary guide path 64m1 (preventing the game ball from reaching the sixth outlet 650a6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6 without passing through the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the player. In addition, game balls that have entered the second normal entrance 640s2 are also provided with the second ordinary taxiway 64m2 similarly to game balls that have entered the first ordinary entrance 640s1. The second ordinary taxiway 64m2 is configured similarly to the first ordinary taxiway 64m1.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game area, there are provided a first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough and a second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 immediately below the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1. Two nails are arranged above the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 so as to oppose each other. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the amount of game balls entering the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 ( (Ease of entering a ball) can be adjusted. Also, the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 have the same shape, are arranged vertically in series, and the game ball that has entered the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 is 2 It is configured to be easy to enter the ball into the normal symbol starting port 67s2.

  In addition, the second symbol display device 83 has a first ordinary symbol display portion 83a in which the first ordinary symbol is variably displayed based on a winning start in the first ordinary symbol opening 67s1 and a second ordinary symbol opening 67s2. A second ordinary symbol display section 83b for variably displaying a second ordinary symbol based on a winning start is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 are arranged vertically in series. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The variable display device unit 80 may be disposed on the left and right sides of the game area with the variable display device unit 80 interposed therebetween, or may be disposed at a desired position as appropriate.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has the normal symbol random number table 202c deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol random number table 202c1, a second random number per design symbol table 202c2, a status selection table 202k, and a random number setting table 202m are respectively added.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first random number per normal symbol table 202c1 is a normal symbol acquired when a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start-up opening 67s1 in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). It is a data table in which a random number value of a normal symbol per random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is stored for the hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, as the random number determined to be a hit, a value in the range of “5 to 7” is set as the hit random value in the first ordinary symbol-per-random number table 202c1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with no time reduction game.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the second normal symbol per random number table 202c2 is a normal symbol acquired when a game ball passes through the second normal symbol start-up opening 67s2 in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). It is a data table in which a random number value of a normal symbol per random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is stored for the hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, a value of “3” is set as a hit random number value in the second ordinary symbol-per-hit random number table 202c2 as a random value determined to be a hit. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with no time reduction game.

  The special hit type table 202b is different from the special hit type table 202b in the first embodiment in that the big hits C to F are set in correspondence with the values of the special hit type counter C2 instead of the big hit A and the big hit B. I have. The big hit C is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0 to 19. The jackpot C is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of five rounds is executed. After the jackpot, a random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  The big hit D is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 20 to 35. The jackpot D is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of five rounds is executed. After the jackpot, the random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is not executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  The big hit E is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 36 to 39. The jackpot E is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of 16R rounds is executed. After the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are randomly set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is not executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  The big hit F is a big hit type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 40 to 99. The jackpot F is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game composed of 16 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting winning device 64 are randomly set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. After the big hit game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the status selection table 202k is a data table in which the values of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e and the value of the status selection counter 203m described later are assigned to the statuses A to E. . In the status determination processing (S513 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the value of a random counter 203q described later is a status change value (in the present embodiment, any of 0 to 39) The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k based on the values of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the status selection counter 203m.

  As shown in FIG. 45B, the random number setting table 202m indicates that the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 64 set in the initial state is 0, 100, 200, or 255. This is a data table in which the value of the random counter 203p is set for each piece of position information on the number of incoming balls of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Specifically, if the value of the random counter 203p is in the range of 0 to 24, the first to eighth swings when the number of balls in the sorting and prize winning device 64 is 0 (or 256). The position information “10101010” of each of the minute rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is selected. Similarly, if the value is in the range of 25 to 29, the position information “100001100” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 100 is selected. If the value is in the range of 30 to 89, the position information “10111001” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 200 is selected. If the value is in the range of 90 to 99, the position information “01010101” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 255 is selected.

  In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203c, and the counter for the time reduction 203d are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol is deleted. The reserved ball storage area 203b1, the second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2, the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1, the second ordinary symbol retained ball number counter 203c2, the first ordinary flag 203j1, the second ordinary flag 203j2, A first general-purpose timer 203k1, a second general-purpose timer 203k2, a status selection counter 203m, a status storage area 203n, a random counter 203p, a distribution position storage area 203q, and a distribution maintenance flag 203r are respectively added.

  The first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is a storage area for storing an ordinary symbol random number counter C4 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 41) in accordance with detection of a winning start in the first ordinary symbol starting opening 67s1. It is. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start-up port 67s1 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 49), the random number per normal symbol is read from the counter buffer. The value of the counter C4 is obtained and stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. The first ordinary symbol flag provided in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is set to ON and stored (stored). The first ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b1 stores four retaining areas so that data (a value of the counter C4, the first ordinary symbol flag) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (reserved) up to a maximum of four times. Have. In the first ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b1, the data of the retaining balls is stored in the order of passing through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (starting winning) in the empty area where the data is emptied. It is stored in order from the area (reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved balls).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described first normal to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each winning start (value of the normal winning random number counter C4) stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. Is shifted to the first ordinary symbol holding ball execution area provided in the game. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The second ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b2 is a storage area for storing an ordinary symbol random number counter C4 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 41) in accordance with detection of a winning start in the second ordinary symbol starting opening 67s2. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, detailed description is omitted.

  The first ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 passes a game ball through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (see FIG. 49). Based on the “start winning prize”, the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) is determined. The counter counts up to four times. The first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is a counter that stores the total number of retained balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process (S1014 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 54, S839).

  The second ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls that the game ball has passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2. Since the configuration is similar, detailed description is omitted.

  The first ordinary power flag 203j1 is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal ball entry process (S116 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to ON based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal ball entry 640s1. On the other hand, the value of the first general-purpose timer 203k1 that measures the time from when the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1 described later is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (5 seconds in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the time has elapsed, it is set to off. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the first ordinary power flag 203j1 is set to off.

  The second ordinary power flag 203j2 is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2. The ON / OFF setting is executed in the same manner as the first ordinary power flag 203j1, although the difference is in that it relates to the second normal entrance 640s2. The second ordinary power flag 203j2 is set to OFF when the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (2s in the present embodiment).

  The first general-purpose timer 203k1 is a timer for measuring a flowing time after the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal entrance processing (S116 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1, the value is set to 0, and thereafter, While the first general power flag 203j1 indicating that a game ball has passed through one normal entrance 640s1 is set to ON, one is added each time the normal entrance processing (S116 in FIG. 56) is executed. Being updated. The first general-purpose timer 203k1 is incremented by one every 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 49). The second general-purpose timer 203k2 is a timer that measures the time that the game ball has flowed since the game ball passed through the second normal entrance 640s2. Although different in that it relates to the second ordinary entrance 640s2, processing such as updating is executed in the same manner as the first ordinary power timer 203k1. In the present embodiment, the first ordinary power timer 203k1 or the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is reset to 0 when the first ordinary flag 203j1 or the second ordinary flag 203j2 is set to ON. The configuration is not limited to this, but may be configured to be reset to 0 when the first ordinary power flag 203j1 or the second ordinary power flag 203j2 is set to off.

  The status selection counter 203m is a counter for selecting a status from the status selection table 202k shown in FIG. The status selection counter 203m is configured by a counter value updated in a range of “0 to 198”. The status selection counter 203m is incremented and updated one by one in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (S1200 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When 1 is added to 198 which is the upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0 which is an initial value.

  The random counter 203p selects the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64 set after the jackpot C and the jackpot F described later from the random number table shown in FIG. 45B. It is a counter for. The random counter 203p is configured with a counter value updated in a range of “0 to 99”. The random counter 203p is incremented and updated one by one in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (S1200 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When 1 is added to 99 which is the upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. When the RAM 203 is initialized, 0, which is an initial value, is set.

  In the distribution position storage area 203q, when there is no game ball flowing down inside the distribution prize winning device 64, respective position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is stored. It is a storage area. The position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q is such that the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are changed in a state where the game balls do not flow down the distribution prize device 64. It is used to monitor whether illegal activities have been performed. Specifically, in the sorting error processing 2 (S1320 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the difference between the sorting winning ball number counter 203e and the sorting discharging ball number counter 203f is 0 (that is, the difference is 0). When it is determined that there is no game ball flowing down in the distribution prize device 64), the respective positional information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64 at that time is stored. Is done.

  At this time, the position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q is determined by the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 as a plus rotation angle (when the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 are turned to the right with the positions of the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 facing vertically upward as the origin, Is stored, and "0" is stored if the rotation angle is a negative rotation angle. After 256 game balls have entered the distribution prize device 64 and have won the first starting port 71, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is determined by the first distribution. The position information is stored as “10101010” in order from the position information of the rotating member 64a1.

  The distribution maintaining flag 203r is a flag indicating that the game balls are not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. The distribution maintaining flag 203r indicates that the difference between the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e and the distribution discharge sphere counter 203f in the distribution error process 2 (S1320 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When it is determined that the value is 0 (that is, a state in which the game ball does not flow down in the distribution winning device 64), it is set to ON. On the other hand, when it is determined in the sorting prize processing 2 (S112 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 in the sorting prize device 64, the game is turned off. Is set. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is turned off.

  In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, the contents of the pseudo fluctuation table 222a and the background selection table 222b are changed from those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pseudo fluctuation table 222a in the first embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation patterns are set for the value of the subordinate winning prize ball number counter 223d, respectively. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the point that the pseudo fluctuation pattern is set for the status of the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 has been changed.

  In the background selection table 222b of the first embodiment, the background pattern is set for each value of the subordinate winning prize ball counter 223d, whereas in the background selection table 222b of the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in a), the point that the background pattern is set for the status of the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 has been changed.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, the subordinate pay-out ball counter 223d, the subordinate discharge ball counter 223e, and the sub-prize counter 223f are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. , A sub status storage area 223h, a normal variation flag 223i, and a background change counter 223j.

  The slave status storage area 223h is a storage area for storing a status type (status information) indicated by the received status command based on receiving a status command output from the main control device 110.

  The normal fluctuation flag 223i is a flag indicating that a normal symbol hit fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received. In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed by the MPU 221 to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received, it is set to ON. Is done. On the other hand, in the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, when the interrupt normal pseudo fluctuation pattern or the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2024 or S2025), it is turned off. Is done. Note that when the RAM 223 is initialized, it is turned off.

  The background change counter 223j is a counter value for determining whether to change a background pattern (background image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The background change counter 223j is a counter value updated in the range of “0 to 99”. In the process of S1615 of the main process (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, the value is incremented by one and updated. When 1 is added to 99 which is the upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. The background selection counter 223j is a counter value acquired in the background selection process 2 (S1650 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the second embodiment (FIG. 49) is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in that the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104) is replaced with the special symbol change process 2. (FIG. 50, S111) replaces the distribution prize processing (FIG. 18, S105), and the distribution prize processing 2 (FIG. 52, S112) replaces the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S108), and replaces the first ordinary. The symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) and the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) are replaced with the through gate passage process (FIG. 22, S109), and the through gate passage process 2 (FIG. 55, S115) is normally entered. A mouth passing process (FIG. 56, S116) is added. The processes in S101 to S103, S107, and S110 to S111 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S101 to S103, S107, and S110 to S111 in the first embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 50, in the second embodiment, a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111). The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111) of the second embodiment is different from the special symbol change start process (FIG. 15, S104) of the first embodiment in the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204). , The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is replaced by the processes of S209 and S210, and the processes of S320 and S330 are respectively added. The processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S203, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is executed. The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 51, executes a process required to start the change of the special symbol.

  In the process of S208, it is determined what the determined jackpot type is, and if it is the jackpot C or the jackpot D, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 5 (S320). On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot E or the jackpot F, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 16 (S330). Thereafter, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S211).

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, in the second embodiment, special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 50, S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. The special symbol change start process 2 (S310), which is one of the processes, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (S310 in FIG. 51). The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) of the second embodiment is different from the special symbol change start process (FIG. 16, S204) of the first embodiment in the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, FIG. 17). S301) has been deleted. As for the other processing, the same processing as the special symbol change starting processing (S204 in FIG. 16) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 52, in the second embodiment, a distribution prize process 2 (FIG. 52, S1112) which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the distribution prize processing 2 (FIG. 52, S112). The distribution prize processing 2 (S112 in FIG. 52) of the second embodiment is different from the distribution prize processing in the first embodiment (S105 in FIG. 18) in that it is determined that a game ball has entered the distribution prize device 64. Then, it is different in that a process of whether or not to change the status is executed.

  In the distribution prize processing 2 (S112 in FIG. 52), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize apparatus 64 (S511). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S511: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to OFF (S512). After that, a status determination process is executed (S513). The status determination processing (S513) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53. However, it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the status type is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the status type is changed. A process for determining is executed.

  The value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is obtained (S514). One is added to the value of the obtained distribution winning ball counter 203e and updated (S515). When the value of the acquired winning prize ball counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, adding 1 updates the initial value to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the entrance 640 (S511: No), the process ends.

  It is determined whether the updated value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is a set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 which is updated by adding 1 from 255) (S516). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first starting port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S516: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0 (S517). That is, the measurement start is set to the time from when the game ball that enters the first starting port 71 enters the first entry port 640 until the game ball enters the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S518). After that, this processing ends.

  In this embodiment, each time a game ball enters the entrance 640, the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to OFF regardless of ON or OFF, but only when ON. , May be set to off.

  Next, referring to FIG. 53, in the second embodiment, a status determination process (S513) which is one process of the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. I do. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this status determination processing (S513).

  In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513), first, the value of the random counter 203p is obtained (S521). It is determined whether the acquired value of the random counter 203p is a status change value (in the present embodiment, any one of 0 to 39) (S522). When it is determined that the value is the status change value (S522: Yes), the value of the status selection counter 203m is acquired (S523). The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k (FIG. 44 (a)) based on the acquired values of the status selection counter 203m and the distribution winning ball counter 203e (S524). A status command is set (generated) based on the determined status type (S525). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired value of the random counter 203p is not the status change value (S522: No), the process ends.

  In this way, every time a game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize winning device 64, whether or not to change (determine or update) the status is determined by lottery, so that the status is random. Can be changed at the opportunity.

  In the status selection table 202k, the ratio of the selected status type is changed according to the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. Further, since the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set so that the ratio of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected according to the type of the status is different, the player performs the fluctuation display. The number of game balls that have entered the current distribution prize apparatus 64 can be predicted based on the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbol that is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having more fun besides winning the special symbol and to get tired of the game early.

  The status selection table 202k also indicates that the status E which is easily selected in the range of 200 to 255 in which the value of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e is close to the value at which the first start port 71 is to be won, is also displayed. Even if the value of the number counter 203e is a low value (for example, a value in the range of 0 to 60), it is configured to be selected. Therefore, when the status E is selected, the first start port is provided to the player. It can be expected that the prize will be close to 71.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, in the second embodiment, a first ordinary symbol variation process (S113), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. I do. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the first ordinary symbol variation process (S113). The first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) is a variation display of the first ordinary symbol performed in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83, and the first blade of the first ordinary electric accessory. This is a process for controlling the opening time of 64s1 and the like.

  In the first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a first ordinary symbol hit. (S831). Regarding the hitting of the first ordinary symbol, the opening / closing control of the first blade 64s1 of the ordinary electric accessory is performed after the indication indicating the winning is displayed on the first ordinary symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83. Includes up to the middle. When it is determined that the first normal symbol is hit (S831: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is not hit (S831: No), it is determined whether the first ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in the variable display (S832). If it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S832: Yes), the variation time of the first ordinary symbol executed in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is changed. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (S833). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S848 described later before the fluctuation display is started in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the first ordinary symbol is set with a variation time of 30 seconds for both the hit variation pattern and the off variation pattern.

  In the processing of S833, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S833: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S833 that the fluctuating time of the fluctuating first ordinary symbol has elapsed (S833: Yes), the first ordinary symbol display unit of the second symbol display device 83 The stop display of 83a is set (S834). In the process of S834, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S844, the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the first ordinary symbol (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S847, the “X” symbol is displayed in the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be stopped (lighted). When the stop display is set by the processing of S8034, the variable display in the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop is performed in the display mode set in the processing of S844 and S847. The symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol this time is a win (S835). When it is determined that the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol is a win (S835: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is set (836). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol is out of this time (S835: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S832, when it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is not in the variable display (S832: No), the value of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 (the variable display in the first ordinary symbol is suspended). The number of times M) is obtained (S837).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is larger than 0 (S838). When it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is 0 (S838: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is not 0 (S838: Yes), the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by one. (S839).

  Next, the data stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is shifted (S840). In the process of S840, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first ordinary symbol hold 1 to the first ordinary symbol hold 4 in the first ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b1 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first ordinary symbol hold 1 → execution area, first ordinary symbol hold 2 → first ordinary symbol hold 1, first ordinary symbol hold 3 → first ordinary symbol hold 2, first ordinary symbol hold 4 → The data in each area is shifted, such as the first ordinary symbol hold 3. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball execution area is obtained (S841).

  Based on the hit determination value of the first normal symbol random number table 202c1 (FIG. 42 (c), a win / fail determination result is obtained (S842), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a win (S843). When it is determined that a win has occurred (S843: Yes), a display mode of “当 た り” which is a display mode at the time of a hit displayed on the first ordinary symbol display section 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is set. (S844) A normal symbol hit variation pattern command (in the present embodiment, there is only one type of normal symbol hit variation pattern command, a command indicating the first normal symbol hit) is set (generated).

  The opening time and the number of times of opening the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 seconds and once, respectively (S846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is out of order (S843: No), the out-of-off-state, which is the out-of-off display mode displayed on the first ordinary symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83, is performed. The display mode of “x” which is the display mode of is set. The fluctuation time of the first ordinary symbol is set to 30 seconds.

  It should be noted that the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) is the same as the first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) in the second ordinary symbol display unit 83b of the second symbol display device 83. The only difference is that the variation display of the symbol and the opening time of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are controlled. Since the same control is executed, illustration and description thereof are omitted. The variation time of the second ordinary symbol is the same as that of the first ordinary symbol, and the same value is set for the opening time and the number of times of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol are configured to be able to simultaneously perform variable display. In addition, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are configured to be able to simultaneously execute the opening control.

  As described above, the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are 0.5 seconds and one time. In this case, the length of one game ball is set to be possible. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls enter the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2 at a time, ball clogging occurs, and an extremely large hit easily occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fluctuation time of the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol is configured to be relatively long as 30 seconds, it takes time until the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol stop changing, and the first ordinary symbol and the first ordinary symbol are changed. The number of lotteries for the second ordinary symbol becomes extremely large, and the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is frequently opened, and the first starting port is extremely increased. It is possible to prevent the player from easily winning the prize.

  Also, since the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 are arranged in series vertically, they pass through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 at the same time. Thus, the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol can easily start to fluctuate in the same period. Therefore, since the variation time of the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol are set to be the same, the determination result is also easily displayed at the same time, and the player can display the variation display result of the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol. You can easily see.

  Referring to FIG. 55, a through gate passage process 2 (S115), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing 2 (S115). In the through gate passage process 2 (S115 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and it is determined that the game ball has passed. In this case, the processing in the case of passing is executed for each of them.

  In the through gate passage process 2 (FIG. 55, S115), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (S921). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (S921: Yes), the value of the first ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S922). It is determined whether the obtained value is less than the upper limit value of 4 (S923). When it is determined that the obtained value is less than 4 (S923: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the obtained first ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c1, and the added value is the first ordinary symbol holding. It is stored in the ball number counter 203c1 (S924). The value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (S921: No), the value of the first ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 is 4 or more (that is, 4 which is the upper limit value). ) (S923: No), the process of S926 is executed.

  It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 (S926). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 (S926: Yes), the value of the second ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S927). It is determined whether the obtained value is less than the upper limit value of 4 (S928). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S928: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the acquired second ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203c2, and the added value is the second symbol holding. It is stored in the ball number counter 203c2 (S929). The value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2 (S930). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2 (S926: No), the value of the second ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 is 4 or more (that is, 4 which is the upper limit value). ) Is determined (S928: No), this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 56, in the second embodiment, the normal entrance processing (S116), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal entrance processing (S116). The normal ball entrance process (S116 in FIG. 56) in the second embodiment is performed when the game ball enters the first normal ball entrance 640s1 and the second normal ball entrance 640s2. By measuring the playing time, it is determined whether the entered game ball is discharged from the sixth discharge port 650a6 to the eighth discharge port 650a8, or whether a time longer than the time for winning the first starting port 71 has elapsed. After that, the processing for correcting the value of the distribution winning prize ball number counter 203e when one game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 or one game ball is guided to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is executed. I do.

  In the normal entrance processing (S116 in FIG. 56), first, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first ordinary entrance 640s1 (S951). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: Yes), the first general power flag 203j1 is set to ON (S952). Thereafter, the first ordinary power timer 203k1 is set to 0 (S953).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: No), it is determined whether the first general power flag 203j1 is on (S954). When it is determined that the first ordinary power flag 203j1 is on (S954: Yes), the value of the first ordinary power timer 203k1 is updated by adding 1 (S955). It is determined whether the updated value exceeds the set value (5 s in the present embodiment) (S956). When it is determined that the updated value exceeds the set value (S956: Yes), the first general power flag 203j1 is set to off (S957). Thereafter, a first distribution correction process is executed (S958). The details of the first distribution correction processing (S958) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. Of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution prize device 64, a process for correcting the deviation is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first ordinary power flag 203j1 is off (S954: No), when it is determined that the value of the first ordinary power timer 203k1 is equal to or less than the set value (S956: No), The process of S959 is performed. In the process of S959, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: Yes), the second general power flag 203j2 is set to ON (S960). Thereafter, the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is set to 0 (S961).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: No), it is determined whether the second general power flag 203j2 is on (S962). When it is determined that the second ordinary power flag 203j2 is ON (S962: Yes), the value of the second ordinary power timer 203k2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S963). It is determined whether the value of the second general-purpose timer 203k2 exceeds a set value (2s in the present embodiment) (S964). When it is determined that the value of the second ordinary power timer 203k2 exceeds the set value (S964: Yes), the second ordinary power flag 203j2 is set to off (S965). A second distribution correction process is performed (S966). In the second distribution correction processing (S966), the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is changed to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 in the processing of S972 of the first distribution correction processing (FIG. 57, S958). Other processes are the same except for the difference, so that illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, a first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), which is one process of the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. ) Will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first distribution correction processing (S958).

  In the first distribution correction processing (FIG. 57, S958), first, when one game ball is guided to the position of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 corresponding to the current value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e. The value of the corresponding sorting prize ball number counter 203e is calculated (S971). Here, it is assumed that, for example, the current value of the distribution prize ball counter 203e is “100”. Since the position data of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 corresponding to the value "100" of the sorting winning ball counter 203e is "100001100", the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 is in the first storage position. The portion 64c6 is in a state of facing upward. In this case, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1 and the game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6, the game ball enters the first accommodation portion 64c6, and the sixth distribution is performed. The rotating member 64a6 rotates leftward to guide the game ball to the sixth guide path 64z12.

  The game ball guided to the sixth guideway 64z12 is guided to the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7. The seventh sorting rotation member 64a7 is located at a position where the second accommodation portion 64d7 faces upward, so that a game ball enters the second accommodation portion 64d7, turns rightward, and moves to the seventh guide path 64z14. Is induced. The game ball guided to the seventh guideway guides the game ball to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. At this time, the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8 is in a state where the second accommodation portion 64d8 is facing upward, so that the game ball enters the second accommodation portion 64d8 and rotates rightward, thereby causing the eighth discharge guide path. The game ball is guided to 64z15, and is discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  Thus, when the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 100, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1, the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 is moved to the second accommodation portion 64d6. Since the seventh distributing rotation member 64a7 is changed to a position where the first accommodating portion c7 and the eighth distributing rotating member 64a8 are directed to the first accommodating portion c8, respectively, the first to eighth distributing members are changed. The position information of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is "10001011", and it is calculated that the position information corresponds to the value 132 of the distribution winning ball counter 203e.

  Next, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e calculated in the process of S971 is updated (S972). The value of the distribution ball count counter 203f is also updated with the same value as the updated prize ball counter value (S973).

  As a result, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1, a deviation occurs between the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is corrected based on the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. The processing can be performed on the basis of this, and the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the misregistration is determined as an illegal prize despite the fact that the first starting port 71 is won in a regular game due to the occurrence of the deviation.

  In addition, since the correction of the value of the distribution ball number counter 203f to the corrected value of the distribution ball number counter 203e is executed, the distribution prize ball number is obtained despite the normal game being played. The difference between the value of the number counter 203e and the value of the sorting / ejection ball number counter 203f is determined as an abnormal setting value (10 in the present embodiment) determined to be abnormal in the sorting error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) described later. It is possible to prevent a problem that is determined as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the correction of the distribution prize ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge sphere number counter 203f is performed by calculation, but is not limited thereto. , The respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are detected, and the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e corresponding to the position is calculated. You may comprise so that it may correct. With such a configuration, the value can be corrected to a more accurate value.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 seconds and one time, so that only one ball enters the first ordinary entrance 640s1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a game ball cannot be directly inserted into the first normal entrance 640s1 (for example, in a state in which the first ordinary electric accessory is open, the first ordinary entrance 640s1). And the like, on which the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is open, a recess capable of holding one game ball. Is formed, and when the first blade 64s1 closes (the projection piece regulated by closing is released) in a state where the game ball enters the concave portion, the first normal ball entrance 640s1 enters the concave portion. A configuration may be adopted in which the held game balls enter. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably suppress the problem that a plurality of game balls enter the first normal entrance 640s1 with one opening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory correspond to the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol, respectively. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 may be configured to correspond to one ordinary symbol and to be simultaneously opened. In addition, the configuration may be such that the blades to be opened are changed according to the symbol type of one normal symbol. With this configuration, since the two blades are simultaneously opened, the player can greatly expect that a game ball will enter the first normal entrance 64s1 or the second entrance 64s2. In addition, a game can be played with an expectation of which blade will open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  With reference to FIG. 58, a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1200). The main process (S1200 in FIG. 58) of the second embodiment is different from the main process (S1200 in FIG. 27) of the first embodiment in that a big hit control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is used instead of the big hit control process (S1203). However, instead of the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207), a distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) is added. The processes in S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1202 is completed, a jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot control process 2 (S1220) which is one of the main processes (S1200 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1220). The jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1200) executes a process of opening and closing the variable prize device 65 depending on the state of the jackpot game. A process of setting the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at positions corresponding to the number of entering balls determined by lottery is executed.

  In the big hit control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220), first, it is determined whether a big hit game has started (S1221). If it is determined that the big hit game has started (S1221: Yes), an opening command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the start of the big hit game is set (generated). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game has not been started (S1221: No), it is determined whether the big hit game is being performed (S1223). If it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game (S1223: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that a big hit game is being played (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1224). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1224: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening opening) is opened by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1225). A round number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the newly started round number is set. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1224: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is satisfied (S1227). Here, the closing condition is whether a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the specific winning opening 65a, or whether one of 30 seconds has elapsed since opening. Is set to

  When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1227: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is closed by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1228). Thereafter, this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (S1229: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229). The ending effect is set when a preset number of rounds ends.

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the big hit game is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1230). It is determined whether the executed jackpot type is the jackpot C or the jackpot F (S1231). That is, the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting and winning device 64 after the jackpot game execute a random setting process in which the random setting process is set to a position corresponding to the number of entered balls determined by lottery. It is determined whether there is.

  When it is determined that the executed jackpot type is the jackpot C or the jackpot F (S1231: Yes), a random setting process is executed (S1232). The details of the random setting process (S1232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but the random number setting table 202m (see FIG. 45 (b)) indicates that the first to eighth distribution prize devices 64a1 after the jackpot game have been executed. A process of setting the positions of .about.64a8 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the executed jackpot type is the jackpot D or the jackpot E (S1231: No), the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 60, a random setting process (S1232) which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 (S1220 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the random setting process (S1232).

  In the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232), first, the value of the random counter 203p is obtained (S1241). Based on the obtained value of the random counter 203p, the setting positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined (selected) from the random number setting table 202m (S1242). The positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are set based on the determined set positions (S1243). The values of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution ball counter 203f are set to values corresponding to the determined set positions (S1244).

  In this manner, when the jackpot game is executed, if the jackpot is the jackpot C or the jackpot F, the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64h are determined by lottery after the jackpot game and correspond to the number of entered balls. 64a8 are respectively set. Therefore, the player performs the jackpot game in the expectation that the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are the hits determined by the lottery, and when the hit is the big hit C or the big hit F, It is possible to play a game by expecting that the ball is not set at a set position corresponding to the number of entering balls as large as possible.

  Further, it is difficult for the player to determine how many balls have been set in the sorting prize winning device 64 after the jackpot, so that the number of balls that will be won in the first starting port 71 is slightly reduced. You can play games with the expectation that it will not.

  In this embodiment, even during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 39, the ball is guided by the taper surface 65 s formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device 65 into the ball entrance 640 of the sorting winning device 64 and enters the ball. It has an easy configuration. Therefore, since the jackpot C or the jackpot D is a jackpot of five rounds, the jackpot game time is short, and the number of game balls entering the entrance 640 is small. Therefore, in the case of a 5-round jackpot, the player strongly expects the jackpot C to be subjected to the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232). On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot E or the jackpot F which is the jackpot of 16 rounds, a certain amount of game balls enter the entrance 640, so even if it is not the jackpot F, It is possible to reduce the number of required balls until the number of balls that wins the one starting port 71. Therefore, the player can obtain the next big hit at an early stage, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the random number setting table 202m, when the value of the random counter 202p meets 90 to 99, the number of entered balls is set to 255. In this case, the game ball wins the first starting port 71, and a continuous big hit can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can obtain many game balls in a shorter time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60) depending on the type of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to determine whether to execute the random setting process (S1232 in FIG. 60). With such a configuration, the player himself / herself can taste the feeling of having performed a lottery, and can increase the pleasure in the jackpot game.

  With reference to FIG. 61, in the second embodiment, a distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320), which is one of the main processes (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing 2 (S1320). In the distribution error process 2 (S1320 in FIG. 61) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1321 to S1322 and S1324 to S1326 are added to the distribution error process of the first embodiment (S1207 in FIG. 28). I have. In each process of S1323, S1327 to S1332 in the second embodiment, the same process as each process of S1301 to S1307 in the first embodiment is executed.

  In the process of S1321, it is determined whether the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1321). When it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1321: Yes), the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q. It is determined whether the position data matches the position data (position information) present (S1322). If it is determined that they match (S1322: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1323). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 do not match the values of the distribution position storage area 203q (S1322: No), S1327 is performed. Is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is off (S1321: No), the processing of S1324 is executed. In the processing of S1324, it is determined whether the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e matches the value of the sorting discharge ball number counter 203f (that is, whether the value difference is 0) (S1324). If it is determined that they match (that is, the difference is 0) (S1324: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1325). Thereafter, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q as position data (position information). This position data is stored in the same manner as the position data of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the random number setting table 202m shown in FIG. Note that the processing of S1327 to S1332 is the same processing as the distribution error processing 2 (S1207 in FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, when it is determined that the game balls are not flowing down into the distribution winning device 64, the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are stored. Until a new game ball enters the distribution prize device 64, the position of the game ball is collated until the game ball does not win the distribution prize device 64. It is possible to monitor whether the eight distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 have rotated. Therefore, fraudulent movement of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 from outside can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first starting port 71 from being illegally won, and it is possible to reduce damage caused by the illegality.

  With reference to FIG. 62, a main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1600). The main processing (S1600 in FIG. 62) of the second embodiment is different from the main processing (S1600 in FIG. 30) of the first embodiment in that the variable display setting processing (FIG. 33, S1611) is replaced with the variable display setting processing 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) replaces the pseudo variation process (FIG. 34, S1612), and pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) replaces the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) and replaces the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 31, S1660) in place of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614). In the processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the second embodiment, the same processes as those in S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the first embodiment are executed. For convenience, the description starts with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed after the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650).

  Referring to FIG. 63, a command determination process 2 (S1660), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1660). The command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (FIG. 63, S1660) is different from the command determination process of the first embodiment (FIG. 31, S1614) in that each process of S1727 to S1730 is performed instead of each process of S1707 to S1712. Has been added. In each process from S1721 to S1726 and S1731 to S1735 in the second embodiment, the same processes as those in S1701 to S1706 and S1713 to S1717 in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1724, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1724; No), the process of S1727 is executed. In the process of S1727, it is determined whether or not the winning pattern command of the ordinary symbol output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1727). When it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command has been received (S1727: Yes), the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S1728).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command has not been received (S1727: No), it is determined whether the status command output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1729). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1729: Yes), the status type is extracted from the received status command and stored in the slave status storage area 223h (S1730). On the other hand, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1729: No), the process of S1731 is executed. Note that the processes from S1731 to S1735 are the same processes as the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. I do. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1630). The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) of the second embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (S1611 of FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment in that steps S1923 to S1907 are performed instead of steps S1903 to S1907. Each process has been added. In each process from S1921 to S1922 and S1929 to S1935 in the second embodiment, the same processes as those in S1901 to S1902 and S1908 to S1912 in the first embodiment are executed.

  When the processing in S1922 is performed, the processing in S1923 is performed. In the processing of S1923, it is determined whether any of the precursor A to precursor C pseudo-variation patterns is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable display (dynamic display) (S1923). If it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo fluctuation patterns is not displayed for fluctuation (S1923: No), the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1723 of the command determination process 2 (S1660 in FIG. 63) is obtained. Is performed (S1924). The variation pattern selected at this time is a variation display mode in which a special symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 11A is executed. Detailed contents are the same as those already described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo variation patterns is displayed in a variable manner (S1923: Yes), the type of the precursor pseudo variation pattern displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 is It is determined what it is (S1925). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation manner is the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous A fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1926).

  Here, the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous A fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol A fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same numbers in the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” voice is output from the voice output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left, and an image of the hero climbing toward the high mountain is displayed (the upper diagram in FIG. 46). Thereafter, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as it is as the special symbol, and the hero is replaced. The image that has reached the top of the mountain is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (a), the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message "Arriving in heaven!" Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation display of the switching A fluctuation pattern is not started even after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the main character does not reach the top of the mountain and the pseudo pattern different from the left and right pseudo patterns is used. The middle symbol stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed as the fluctuation is the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous B fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1927).

  Here, the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous B fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol B fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same numbers in the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” voice is output from the voice output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, the hero is displayed, and an image in which the hero jumps toward the sky is displayed. Thereafter, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous B variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is replaced as it is as the special symbol, and the hero is replaced with the special symbol. The image that reaches the top of the cloud is displayed. Then, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (b), the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the message “Arriving in the heavens!” Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, when the fluctuation display of the switching b fluctuation pattern does not start even after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the middle symbol is a pseudo symbol different from the left and right pseudo symbols while the main character does not reach above the cloud. Stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation manner is the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous C fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1928).

  Here, the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous C fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol C fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (the numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to fluctuate at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same numbers in the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” voice is output from the voice output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed to the upper left, an image of the closed door is displayed, and an image in which the closed door repeatedly opens and closes slightly is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins in the first opening 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed at the upper left is replaced as it is as the special symbol and closed. The image with the door open is displayed. Then, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 47, the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the character “Arrival at heaven!” Is displayed below it. Is done. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern, when the fluctuation display of the switching C fluctuation pattern is not started even after the fluctuation time elapses, a pseudo pattern different from the left and right pseudo symbols is left without opening the closed door. The middle symbol stops at the symbol, and the variable display ends.

  Note that the processes from S1929 to S1935 are the same as the processes already described in the variable display setting process (S1611 in FIG. 33) of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a pseudo variation process 2 (S1640), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (S1640).

  In the pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variation on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S2021). If it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S2021: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2021: No), it is determined whether the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022). When it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the pseudo symbol is being displayed (S2023). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being fluctuated (S2023: Yes), the interruption normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, and the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to off (S2024).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. The pseudo symbol being displayed is reduced and displayed below the third symbol display device 81, and is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The character "Emergency News Shortcut!" Is displayed above the pseudo symbol, and the first ordinary electric accessory is displayed. Of the first blade 64s1 or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened, and the game ball enters the first ordinary ball entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary ball entrance 640s2. Will be notified.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped and displayed (S2023: No), the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, and the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to off (S2025).

  Here, the ordinary pseudo fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the character "Attack Chance" is displayed, and the character "Aim for the right chucker!" The first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened to allow a game ball to enter the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2. Notify that it will be in a state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is off (S2022: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2026). Here, the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol includes the fluctuating display of the interrupted normal pseudo fluctuating pattern and the normal normal pseudo fluctuating pattern. When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being changed and displayed (S2026: Yes), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2026: No), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2027). Based on the obtained value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the slave status storage area 223h, the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is selected from the pseudo fluctuation table 222a (see FIG. 44B). Is performed (S2028). Based on the selected (set) pseudo fluctuation pattern, a display pseudo fluctuation pattern command is set (generated).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44B, the pseudo fluctuation table 222a is set so that the selection ratio is different for the fluctuation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol corresponding to the status type. Specifically, the status E is configured such that the precursor C pseudo variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a, and the status D, the status C, the status B, and the status A are sequentially arranged in this order. The setting is made so that the selection ratio becomes lower for the precursor C pseudo variation pattern. Further, for the precursor B fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected in the case of the status C is set to be high, and for the precursor A fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected in the case of the status B is configured to be high. ing.

  Further, since each status is set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 so that the ratio selected by the value in the distribution winning prize ball counter 203e is different, the status depends on the selection frequency of the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol. It is configured to be able to predict the number of game balls that have won the current distribution prize device 64.

  Therefore, the more skilled the game is, the more the number of game balls that have won the distribution prize winning device 64 can be predicted from the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol. Therefore, not only the special symbol jackpot but also the fun of prediction can be obtained, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. In addition, as the game is performed, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be determined, and the player can play the game for a longer time.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning pattern of a normal symbol is received, a predetermined notification mode is configured to be displayed in a pseudo symbol state in a pseudo symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If a pseudo symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner when the hit fluctuation pattern is received, the pseudo symbol is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, an opportunity such as 341) to provide a normal symbol to the player. May be notified. With such a configuration, the player can be more interested in the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol.

  Next, the background selection process 2 (S1650), which is one of the main processes (S1600 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the background selection process 2 (S1650).

In the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650), first, the value of the background change counter 223j is obtained (S2121). It is determined whether the acquired value of the background change counter 223j is greater than 50, that is, is greater than or equal to 51 (S2122). When it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is equal to or greater than 51 (S2122: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is obtained (S2123). A background pattern (background image type) is selected (determined) from the background selection table 222b based on the acquired pseudo variation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the slave status storage area 223h (S2124). . A display background command based on the selected background pattern is set (generated). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is equal to or less than 50 (S2122: No), the process ends.

  As described above, since whether or not to change the background image is determined by lottery, the background image can be changed at random. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing in the game.

  In addition, since the background pattern is set so that the selection ratio is different based on the status type, depending on the frequency of the displayed background pattern, a player who enters the current sorting winning award device 64 The number can be predicted.

  In the status E in which the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e is easy to be selected with a large value, the status E is also selected when the value of the sorting prize ball number counter 203e is relatively small (for example, 10 or the like). In fact, even if the number of the game balls that have won the sorting prize winning device 64 is small, the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71 is expected to be reached shortly with expectation. A game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game before the number of game balls that will win the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls entering the entrance 640 is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine 10 may be provided so as to output the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 outside the pachinko machine 10. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the current number of game balls that have won the distribution prize winning device 64 to the player at the judgment of the game store. Therefore, by informing the game store of information that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to bring more players to the store.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing game balls to a first flow path and a second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; A second passage switching means for alternately distributing the game ball to the fourth passage, and a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the fourth passage allocated to the second passage switching means can enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, a winning / failing determination means for performing a winning / falling determination of a game, and a bonus game is given to the player based on the winning / failing determination result obtained by the winning / falling determination means. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a bonus game executing means to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching member are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, a hit determination is executed by the hit determination means. The bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the ball entrance every predetermined number, and the player can determine which ball of the game ball has been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It is possible to enjoy the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, there is a game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, and the game ball distribution means is capable of distributing game balls. A ball entrance, a guide path for guiding game balls entering from the entrance to the first flow path switching means, and discharging game balls distributed to the first flow path by the first flow path switching means. A gaming machine A2, comprising: a first discharge port for discharging game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, in the game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game ball which has entered the distribution ball opening through which the game ball can enter is placed in the first flow path. It is guided to the switching means by a guide path. Game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means are discharged from the first discharge port. Further, the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means are discharged from the second discharge port. Thereby, the player can easily distribute the game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path that does not enter the ball entrance due to the discharge of the game ball through the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the progress of the game without concentrating on whether or not the player has entered the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, to the special entrance where the hit judgment is executed by the hit judgment unit based on the entrance of a game ball different from the entrance and to the special entrance in the normal gaming state. Entry of game balls is set to be difficult, and in a special game state different from the normal game state, entry of game balls into the special entrance is set more easily than in the normal game state. Means, a bonus game type determining means for determining a normal bonus game for setting the gaming state after the bonus game to the normal gaming state and a special bonus game for setting the gaming state after the bonus game to the special gaming state; The gaming machine A3, wherein the special entrance in the special game state is configured such that game balls can enter the entrance more easily than the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 or A2. That is, when a game ball enters a special entrance that is different from the entrance, a hit determination is performed by the hit determination unit. In the normal game state, it is set to be difficult to enter the game ball into the special entrance, and in the special game state different from the normal game state, the entry of the game ball into the special entrance is more than in the normal game state. It is easily set by the entry control means. The special bonus game for setting the game state after the bonus game to the normal game state and the special bonus game for setting the game state after the bonus game to the special game state are determined by the bonus game type determination means. In the special game state, the special entrance is configured to allow game balls to enter the ball more easily than the entrance. Therefore, in the normal game state, a predetermined number of game balls enter the entrance and the hit / fail judgment is performed. However, in the special game state, the game balls enter the special entrance more easily than in the special game state. Since the ball can be played, an efficient game can be provided. Therefore, the player can play different games between the normal game state and the special game state, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit may be configured such that the first storage unit capable of receiving a game ball and the first storage unit capable of receiving a game ball A different second accommodating section, the first accommodating section and the second accommodating section are provided, and the second accommodating section is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the second accommodating section or the fourth accommodating section is rotated. The game ball is distributed to the first accommodation unit and rotated to a first position at which the game ball can be received. At the first position, the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first accommodation unit, and the Turning means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and turning the game balls to a second position at which the game balls can be received in the second accommodating portion; and a game at the first position or the second position. Before receiving the ball into the first or second receiving section, the ball is moved from the first position to the first or second receiving section. Position or gaming machine the pivot means from the second position to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. The game device is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is turned to a second position at which the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  Initial control means for executing either one of an initialization control process for initializing the gaming machine when the gaming machine is powered on and an initial control process for setting the gaming machine to a state immediately before the power is turned off; After the control process or the initial control process is executed, a normal control means for executing a normal control process for executing a normal game is provided. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the road, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path. A second flow path switching means, a ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, and a game ball entering the entrance port; Determination means for performing a determination as to whether or not a game is based on A bonus game executing means for granting a bonus game to a player based on a winning result, and at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means in the initialization control processing. A game machine B1 comprising: initial switching setting means for setting a state in which game balls can be distributed to a predetermined flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are obtained. That is, one of an initialization control process for initializing the gaming machine when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and an initial control process for setting the gaming machine to a state immediately before the power is turned off is executed by the initial control means. After the initialization control process and the initial control process are performed, the normal control process for performing a normal game is performed by the normal control unit. Game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, a hit determination is executed by the hit determination means. The bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. By the initialization control process, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set by the initial switching setting means to a state in which game balls can be distributed to a predetermined flow path. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the ball entrance every predetermined number, and the player can determine which ball of the game ball has been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It is possible to enjoy the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Also, when the gaming machine is initialized, the flow path through which the game balls are distributed is set so as to be a predetermined flow path, so from the initial state until the game balls enter the entrance port. Can be set to a certain number or more. Therefore, by setting the initial state, it is possible to reduce the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of each gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from a first storage part capable of receiving game balls and a second storage part different from the first storage part capable of receiving game balls. And the first storage section and the second storage section are provided, and are rotated by receiving game balls in the second storage section, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. Then, the first storage portion is rotated to a first position capable of receiving a game ball, and the first position is rotated by receiving a game ball in the first storage portion, thereby rotating the first passage or the first passage. Turning means for distributing the game balls to the three flow paths and turning the game balls to a second position capable of receiving the game balls in the second accommodating portion; and, in the first position or the second position, the game balls in the first position or the second position. The second position or the second position from the first position before receiving in the receiving portion or the second receiving portion The rotation means to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting from the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. By rotating by receiving the game ball, the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is rotated to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodation portion by the rotation means. It is turned. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  In the gaming machine B2, the initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means at the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position by the initial switching setting means. The number of gaming balls required to be distributed to the flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means and to enter the ball entrance can be set to the maximum. Therefore, by initializing the gaming machines, the settings between the gaming machines can be made equal, the ball can be made to enter the entrance at an early stage, and the jackpot is given early, thereby causing damage to the game store. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, an initial value for determining whether to set the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means to the first position or the second position, respectively. A switching position determining unit, wherein the initial switching setting unit sets the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit based on the setting determined by the initial switching position determining unit; A gaming machine B4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, the initial switching position determining means determines which of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means is set to the first position or the second position. The first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively set by the initial switching setting means based on the settings determined by the initial switching position determining means. With this, when the gaming machine is initialized, the setting with the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means is randomly set each time in each gaming machine. The setting of the first flow path switching means or the setting of the second flow path switching means can be easily changed. Therefore, the player can select a gaming machine having a pleasure of selecting a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player from among the plurality of gaming machines, even if the gaming machine has been initialized. Therefore, the pleasure of playing a game can be increased.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing game balls to a first flow path and a second flow path; and a third flow path for distributing game balls to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A second passage switching means for alternately distributing the game flow to the fourth passage and a fourth passage, and a ball entrance through which game balls flowing down the fourth passage allocated to the second passage switching means can enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, a winning / failing determination means for performing a determination of success / failure of a game, and a bonus game is given to the player based on the hit / failure determination result obtained by the hit / fail determination means. The bonus game executing means to be provided, and after the bonus game, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set to a state in which the game ball is distributed to which flow path. And a flow path determining means for determining whether to perform the game. 1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path allocated to the second flow path switching means can enter, a hit determination is executed by the hit determination means. The bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the ball entrance every predetermined number, and the player can determine which ball of the game ball has been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It is possible to enjoy the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Also, after the end of the privilege game, the flow path is determined to which of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means the game ball is set to be allocated to which flow path. Determined by means. Thus, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly before the game ball enters the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. Can be expected. Therefore, more fun can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided in a first housing portion capable of receiving game balls and a second housing different from the first storage portion capable of receiving game balls. Part, the first accommodating part and the second accommodating part are provided, and the game ball is rotated by receiving a game ball in the second accommodating part, and a game ball is inserted into the second channel or the fourth channel. Distribute and rotate to a first position where game balls can be received in the first storage section, and rotate by receiving game balls in the first storage section at the first position to rotate the first flow path or Turning means for distributing the game balls to the third flow path and turning the game balls to a second position at which the game balls can be received in the second accommodating portion; Before receiving in the first storage section or the second storage section, the second position or the second position Gaming machine C2, wherein said rotating means to the first position from the position in which having a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. The game device is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is turned to a second position at which the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  In the gaming machine C2, the flow path determination means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to either the first position or the second position based on a predetermined lottery. The rotation means is configured to autonomously rotate the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means respectively to the position determined by the flow path determination means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, based on the predetermined lottery, the flow path determination means determines which of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set to the first position or the second position. In the rotation means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively rotated by the rotation means to the positions determined by the flow path determination means. This makes it possible to easily set the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit after the bonus game. Therefore, the processing at the time of ending the privilege game can be reduced, and the time from execution of the privilege game to execution of the normal game can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means correspond to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means until a game ball enters the entrance opening. The apparatus has a setting table in which settings with the second flow path switching means are respectively stored, and the flow path determination means is required to enter a game ball into the entrance based on the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means is determined, and the settings of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set from the setting table based on the number of game balls. A gaming machine C4 that is determined individually.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4. That is, the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means are set in accordance with the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for causing the game balls to enter the ball entrance. Are stored in the setting table. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for causing the game balls to enter the entrance is determined, and the first flow path switching means and The setting with the second flow path switching means is respectively determined by the flow path determination means. This makes it possible to easily set the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member in accordance with the number of game balls required to allow game balls to enter the ball entrance. Therefore, the control load after execution of the bonus game can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or the game information relating to the game; and Game machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for giving a bonus to a player, comprising a sorting prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize means comprises A sorting ball entrance through which game balls can enter the distribution prize means, and game balls entering the sorting ball entrance are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. First flow path switching means, and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the two flow paths to a third flow path and a fourth flow path for guiding the game ball to the entrance; Counting means for counting the number of game balls, and game information determining means for determining the game information to be displayed on the display means based on a count value of the counting means for sorting winning. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit as identification information or game information relating to the game. When the identification information indicating that the result of the determination is a hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game for giving the privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means alternately flow into the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. It is sorted by the road switching means. The number of game balls in the distribution prize means is counted by the distribution prize counting means. Game information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the game information determination means based on the count value of the distribution winning in-counter. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Also, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the distribution prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening, so the player must enter the entrance entrance It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the sorting prize winning means, thereby providing more game enjoyment. Further, since the game information displayed on the display means is determined by the number of game balls entering the sorting prize means, the game information is displayed at a random opportunity, and the player Can be prevented from becoming boring.

  In the gaming machine D1, the number-of-balls counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the sorting ball entrance, and the game information determining means, wherein the count value of the counting means within the sorting prize is a predetermined count value. A game machine D2 characterized in that the game machine D2 determines one of the game information out of a plurality of different types of game information based on the count value of the number-of-incidence counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. In other words, the number of game balls that have entered the sorting entrance is counted by the entering ball count means. The game information is determined based on the count value of the inside of the sorting winning a prize based on the count value of the inside of the sorting winning a prize, when the count value of the sorting inside winning a prize is a predetermined count value, the game information of a plurality of different types of game information is determined. Determined by means. As a result, the game information is determined based on the count value of the counting means within the sorting prize, so that information on the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize means is notified to the player based on the determined game information. Can be. Therefore, the player determines the number of game balls to be entered into the sorting prize means required before entering the entrance opening from the information on the number of game balls which have won the sorting prize means from the game information. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is information relating to background information on which the identification information is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the game information is constituted by the information on the background information of the display means on which the identification information is displayed. The game information can be confirmed even when the game is running, and the information about the game can be obtained.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are configured such that a first accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball and a first accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball are: A different second accommodating section, the first accommodating section and the second accommodating section are provided, and the second accommodating section is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the second accommodating section or the fourth accommodating section is rotated. The game ball is distributed to the first accommodation unit and rotated to a first position at which the game ball can be received. At the first position, the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first accommodation unit, and the Turning means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and turning the game balls to a second position at which the game balls can be received in the second accommodating portion; and a game at the first position or the second position. Before the ball is received in the first receiving section or the second receiving section, Gaming machine and said second said rotating means and position or from the second position to the first position are those having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Move the received game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and to the first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion and the first position at the first position where the game balls can be received. The game device is rotated by receiving a game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is turned to a second position at which the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion. To rotate. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotation means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. Is restricted by the rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. In addition, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is regulated when the game ball does not enter the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion, the rotation is continuous. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or the game information relating to the game; and Game machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for giving a bonus to a player, comprising a sorting prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize means comprises A sorting ball entrance through which game balls can enter the distribution prize means, and game balls entering the sorting ball entrance are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. First flow path switching means, and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means for alternately distributing game balls distributed to the two flow paths to a third flow path and a fourth flow path for guiding the game ball to the entrance, and the distribution entrance opening; In response to establishment of a condition for starting dynamic display of pseudo-identification information, which is one of the game information, based on the number-of-balls counting means for updating the count value based on the fact that a game ball has Pseudo dynamic display mode determining means for determining one pseudo dynamic display mode among the dynamic display modes of the plurality of pseudo identification information based on the count value of the number of filled ball count means. A gaming machine E1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine E1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit as identification information or game information relating to the game. When the identification information indicating that the result of the determination is a hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game for giving the privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance opening, the first game ball in which the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance for allowing the game ball to enter the sorting winning prize is guided out of the sorting winning prize means. The first and second channels are alternately distributed to the channel and the second channel. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means is guided to the third flow path which is guided outside the distribution winning means and the fourth flow path which is guided to the entrance. The flow is alternately distributed to the flow path by the second flow path switching unit. The count value is updated by the number-of-balls counting means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the sorting ball entrance. When a condition for starting dynamic display of pseudo identification information, which is one of the game information, is met, one of a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo identification information is displayed based on the count value of the number-of-balls counting means. The pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo dynamic display mode determining means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Also, based on the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning means, a dynamic display mode of pseudo identification information, which is one of game information, is determined and dynamically displayed. Thus, the player can determine the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, even when the game ball does not enter the entrance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means sets the pseudo-dynamic display mode as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information when a game ball enters the distribution entrance. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being determined.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo dynamic display mode determining means as a condition for starting the dynamic display in the pseudo identification information that a game ball has entered the distribution entrance, Since the dynamic display is started in the pseudo dynamic display mode at the timing when the game ball enters the distribution winning means, the timing of the dynamic display in the pseudo dynamic display mode can be easily recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize at what timing the pseudo dynamic display mode is based on the ball that has entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately recognize the number of gaming balls that have entered the distribution prize means than in the pseudo dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means, when a game ball enters the entrance and the display is performed on the identification information, A game machine E3 comprising: display switching means for switching the pseudo dynamic display mode to the display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a state where the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means, when a game ball enters the entrance and the display is executed in the identification information, the pseudo dynamic display mode is identified. The display is switched by the display switching means to display information. Therefore, even when the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the display is switched to the display of the identification information, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the display of the identification information.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a dynamic identification display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information to one of a plurality of dynamic identification display modes, When the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode determining means determines a dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the pseudo dynamic display mode being dynamically displayed, 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein when the pseudo dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display mode, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode is determined when the pseudo dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display mode. A gaming machine E4 according to any one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved. That is, one of the plurality of dynamic identification display modes of the identification information is dynamically determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. On the other hand, when the pseudo dynamic display mode is the non-dynamic display, the dedicated dynamic identification display mode when the pseudo dynamic display mode is the non-dynamic display is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. You. As a result, the dynamic identification display mode is determined in accordance with the pseudo-dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed, so that the player feels unnaturally switching from the pseudo-dynamic display mode to the dynamic identification display mode. Can be prevented. Accordingly, the player can identify the content of the pseudo dynamic display mode as a dynamic display that is linked to the dynamic identification display mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the pseudo dynamic display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. The sorting prize means has a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter in the sorting prize means, and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port in the first channel. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means alternately movable between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to the second flow path, and the second flow path is provided by the first flow path switching means. A third position for distributing the game balls distributed to the road to the third flow path, and a fourth position for guiding the game balls to the entrance. A second flow path switching means having a second distribution movable means alternately movable to a fourth position for distribution to the road; and a position determining means for at least determining the position of the second distribution movable means. When a game ball enters the entrance, based on the position of the second distribution movable unit determined by the position determination unit, a position monitoring unit that determines whether the position is a normal position. A gaming machine F1 comprising: an abnormality processing execution unit that executes an abnormality process when the position monitoring unit determines that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the gaming machine F1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding a game ball to a ball entrance, a first position at which a game ball having entered a sorting ball inlet through which a game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to a first flow path. And a second position which is alternately moved to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by a second flow path switching unit having a second distribution moving unit that moves alternately. The position of the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether the position is a normal position based on the position of the second position movable means determined by the position determination means. Then, when the position monitoring means determines that there is an abnormality, the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing executing means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Further, when a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined based on the position of the second distribution movable means whether or not the ball is abnormally entered, so that illegal entry can be suppressed. Therefore, damage caused by illegally entering the entrance can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters the entrance, if a game ball enters the distribution entrance later than the entered game ball, then, The position monitoring means includes a subsequent position determining means for determining that the entered game ball has moved the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means. A gaming machine F2, which determines whether or not it is in a normal position based on the result of the determination by the subsequent position determining means when the ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance, if a game ball enters the distribution entrance after the entered game ball, the game ball entered thereafter Has moved the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means by the subsequent position determination means. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position discriminating means determines whether the position is a normal position based on the result of the discrimination by the subsequent position discriminating means. Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance, it is possible to more accurately determine whether the ball entered the entrance due to a normal game. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the game ball; a hit determination unit for executing a hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition; and A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. And the sorting prize means comprises: a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; And a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the flow to a fourth flow path that guides the game. And a game ball whose count value is to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. If the value indicates that the game ball has reached the count value, the measuring means for measuring the time since the game ball passed through the sorting entrance, and the game ball entered the entrance In the case, it is determined whether or not the measurement time of the measurement means is within the valid time, and if the measurement time is outside the validity period, the abnormal ball monitoring means for performing an abnormal process for the abnormal ball is provided. A gaming machine G1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. The count value is updated by the number-of-balls counting means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the sorting ball entrance. When the count value is a value indicating that a game ball to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered, the game ball having the count value is distributed. The time after passing through the ball opening is measured by the measuring means. When a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined whether or not the measurement time of the measuring means is within the valid time. Performed by means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Also, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance, if it is determined that the ball has entered outside the valid time, abnormal processing will be executed as abnormal entry, so that entry into the entrance due to fraud Can reduce the damage caused by

  In the gaming machine G1, the abnormally entering ball monitoring means, if the game ball does not enter the entrance port even if the measuring time of the measuring means has passed the validity period, the abnormal entering ball A gaming machine G2 for executing processing.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, if the game ball does not enter the entrance even after the validity period of the time measured by the measuring unit has elapsed, the abnormal entry monitoring unit executes abnormal processing for the abnormal entry. By this, if it is determined that the game ball that will enter the entrance to the entrance ball has entered the distribution entrance, if it is not determined that it entered even after the expiration of the validity period, Since the abnormal processing is executed, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has been thrown into the sorting prize winning means due to improper operation, or that a ball is clogged in the sorting prize winning means due to a malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to detect and improve the damage caused by the fraud and the disadvantage of the player due to the malfunction at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the abnormal ball monitoring means includes a value indicating that a game ball having the count value to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered the ball. The game machine G3 is characterized in that when a game ball enters the entrance while the measuring means is not timing, the abnormality processing for the abnormal entry is executed. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the count value of the number-of-balls counting means is not determined by the second flow path switching means to be a value indicating that a game ball to be distributed to the fourth flow path has entered the ball, and the measuring means is not determined. When a game ball enters the entrance when the timer is in a timing mode, abnormal processing for abnormal entry is executed by the abnormal entry monitoring means. Thereby, even if the ball is entered when the conditions for entering the entrance are not the same, it is processed as an abnormally entered ball, so that irregularities, defects, and the like can be found at an early stage. Therefore, a game can be played normally by detecting an injustice that is illegally detected as an incoming ball by radio waves or the like or a defect due to a clogged ball, etc. at an early stage.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. And the sorting prize means comprises: a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching unit for alternately distributing the game balls to the second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; And a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the flow to a fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and Based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger, the number of incoming balls counting means for counting the number of game balls, the number of discharged balls counting means for counting the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path, A comparing means for comparing the count value of the incoming ball number counting means with the count value of the ejected ball number counting means, and when the comparison result by the comparing means is determined to have a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined abnormal number; A game machine H1 characterized by having abnormal ball monitoring means for executing an abnormal process as an abnormal ball.

  According to the gaming machine H1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. The number of game balls that have entered the sorting entrance is counted by the entering ball count means. Further, the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path is counted by the discharged ball number counting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined opportunity, the count value of the number of incoming balls counting means and the count value of the number of discharged balls counting means are compared by the comparing means. When it is determined that the comparison result by the comparison means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of abnormalities, the abnormal processing as an abnormal ball is executed by the abnormal ball monitoring means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Further, since the difference between the game ball that has entered the sorting prize means and the game ball that has been ejected is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, it is determined whether the ball has been illegally entered into the sorting prize means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such as a game ball being illegally entered into the distribution prize means from other than the distribution ball entrance. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a win. And the sorting prize means comprises: a sorting ball port through which game balls can enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball having entered the sorting ball port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching unit for alternately distributing the game balls to the second flow path, and a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means; And a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the flow to a fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and The number of entered balls is added based on the fact that the game ball has been guided from the first channel or the third channel, and is subtracted from the number of entered balls. A counting means for counting the number of game balls that are balling, and an abnormal ball entry when the count value of the counting means for counting the ball is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined abnormal number or less than a normal number. A gaming machine H2, comprising: an abnormal entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. The number of incoming balls is added based on the incoming ball at the sorting inlet, and the number of incoming balls is subtracted from the number of incoming balls based on the fact that a game ball has been guided from the first channel or the third channel. The number of gaming balls entering the pay-in prize means is counted by the counting means during the entry. When it is determined that the count value of the in-ball entry counting means is equal to or greater than the predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number, the abnormal-incidence monitoring means executes the abnormal processing as an abnormal ball entry. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. In addition, game balls in the ball are counted in the sorting prize means, and it is determined whether or not the ball is illegally entered in the sorting prize means by determining that the count value is equal to or more than the abnormal number or less than the normal number. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such as a game ball being illegally entered into the distribution prize means from other than the distribution ball entrance. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the game ball; a hit determination unit for executing a hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition; and A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the hit / fail determination, in a gaming machine having a winning prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The sorting prize means includes: a sorting ball port that allows game balls to enter the sorting prize means; and a game ball that has entered the sorting ball port in the first channel. A first flow path switching means having first distribution moving means alternately movable between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to the second flow path; The third position where game balls distributed to the flow path are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path And a second flow path switching means having a second flow path moving means which alternately moves between the first distribution moving means and the second distribution moving means. Position discriminating means, a sorting ball discriminating means for discriminating whether a game ball has entered the sorting prize means, and a game ball in the sorting prize means by the sorting ball discriminating means. In a state where it is determined that the ball has not entered, the position determined by the position determination unit is determined to be an abnormal operation when at least one of the first distribution movable unit and the second distribution movable unit is changed in position. A game comprising: an abnormal operation determining unit that determines based on information; and an abnormal processing executing unit that executes an abnormal process when the abnormal operation determining unit determines that the abnormal operation is performed. Machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means. Position information indicating the positions of the first distribution movable unit and the second distribution movable unit is determined by the position determination unit. During the state in which no game ball has been entered in the sorting prize means by the sorting ball determination means for determining whether a game ball has been entered in the sorting prize means, the first sorting is performed. Abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means based on the position information determined by the position determining means, with the fact that at least one of the movable means and the second distribution movable means has changed in position. When the abnormal operation is determined by the abnormality determining means, the abnormal processing is executed by the abnormal processing executing means. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, when the position of at least one of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means is changed in a state in which no game ball has entered the distribution prize means, abnormal processing is performed as abnormal operation. Since the execution is executed, the fraudulent operation of the distribution prize means to fraudulently causing the game ball to enter the entrance can be suppressed. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from a first storage part capable of receiving game balls and a second storage part different from the first storage part capable of receiving game balls. And the first storage section and the second storage section are provided, and are rotated by receiving game balls in the second storage section, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. Then, the game ball is rotated to the first position or the third position at which the game ball can be received in the first storage portion, and the game ball is received by the first storage portion at the first position or the third position. Rotating means for moving the game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and turning the game ball to the second position or the fourth position at which the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion; In the first position or the second position, the game ball is moved to the first accommodation portion or the second position. A first rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotation means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before being received by the container; At the position or the fourth position, the turning means from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first storage portion or the second storage portion. And a second rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodation portion and a second accommodation portion capable of receiving a game ball, and are rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodation portion. Moving the received game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first position or the third position capable of receiving the game ball in the first accommodation portion and the first position or the third position. In this position, the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first storage portion, the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is turned by the turning means to the second position or the fourth position. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion. Is restricted by the first rotation restricting means. In addition, in the third position or the fourth position, the rotating means rotates from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion. Is restricted by the second rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate between the first position and the second position or between the third position and the fourth position, so that the game balls are reliably swung alternately. Can be divided. In addition, the rotation from the first position to the second position or the second position to the first position, the rotation from the third position to the fourth position, or the fourth position to the third position is performed when the game ball is moved to the first storage portion or the second storage position. When the ball has not entered the section, the ball is regulated, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from being continuously received in the same accommodation section. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably distribute the game balls alternately.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the entering of the game ball; a hit determination unit for executing a hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition; and A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which a bonus is granted to a player based on the result of the success / failure determination being a win, and an open state in which the gaming ball can be guided inside and a gaming ball guided inside. A movable piece movable to a closed state that makes it difficult to perform, and a determination condition for determining whether to change the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the entering or passing of the game ball. A specific entrance that is determined to be established, and a lottery determination unit that performs a lottery that varies the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a hit by the lottery determination unit. If judged A moving means for moving the movable piece from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time, comprising: a distribution prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance; The distribution prize means includes: a distribution ball entrance through which game balls can enter into the distribution prize means; and a game ball having entered the distribution ball entrance into the first flow path and the second flow path. A first flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls, and a second flow for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the first flow path switching means. Path switching means, and an introduction guideway for guiding a game ball to at least one of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means from outside the distribution prize means, The movable piece closes the guide port in the closed state and plays in the open state in the guide port communicating with the outside of the sorting prize winning means. Gaming machine J1, wherein those that are configured provided to direct the ball into the introduction guide path game balls.

  According to the gaming machine J1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. A bonus game for granting a bonus to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit. The determination condition for determining whether to change the movable piece movable between the open state in which the game ball can be guided and the closed state in which the game ball cannot be easily guided is based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entrance. The lottery is executed by the lottery judging means based on the establishment of the judgment condition. When the lottery result is determined to be a hit, the movable piece is moved from the closed state to the open state by the movable means for a predetermined time. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game sphere which has entered the sorting entrance where the game sphere can enter in the sorting prize means is provided in the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. Game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance by the second flow path switching means. A game ball is guided to the at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means from the outside of the distribution prize winning means by the introduction guiding path. A movable piece provided in the guideway of the introduction guideway closes the guideway in the closed state, and guides the game ball to the guideway in the open state. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, since the movable ball is opened to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, a game ball can be guided from the outside of the sorting prize winning means. By entering the game ball directly without passing through the ball opening, the freshness can be felt. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game.

  A ball entry opening for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which a variable prize device that awards a player a bonus game ball based on the fact that the result of the determination is a hit, A distribution prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the distribution prize means includes a distribution ball entrance through which a game ball can enter the distribution prize means, and the distribution A first flow path switching means having a first distribution movable means alternately movable between a first position for distributing a game ball entering a ball opening to a first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to a second flow path; And the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A second flow path switching means having second distribution moving means alternately movable between a third position for distributing to a road and a fourth position for distributing to a fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The variable prize device and the distribution prize means are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball opening when a game ball enters the variable prize device. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit being a hit, a bonus game that enables the variable winning device that gives the player a bonus game ball to execute a game ball is executed by the bonus game execution unit. In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball which has entered the sorting entrance where the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means. The variable prize device and the sorting prize means are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball opening when game balls are entered into the variable prize device. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting prize means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. In addition, during the award game, it is possible to enter the sorting ball entrance, so during the award game, by entering the ball into the sorting prize means, it is possible to enter the ball entry port after the award game. The required number of entering balls can be reduced, and a state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Therefore, the player can be motivated to make many game balls enter not only the variable prize device but also the sorting prize means during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game includes at least a special privilege game in which the variable prize means has a longer open time and a normal privilege game in which the variable prize means has a shorter open time than the special privilege game. A gaming machine K2 comprising privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game based on the result of the determination by the means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1. That is, in the privilege game, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is long and a normal privilege game in which the variable prize means has a shorter opening time than the special privilege game are set. Based on the result being a hit, the type of the bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means. As a result, when the special privilege game is determined, not only the opening time of the variable prize device is extended but also an opportunity to allow more game balls to enter the distribution prize means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more benefits for the types of privilege games.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable winning device has a rotating door rotatably supported on the front side of the gaming machine, and in a normal state, the variable winning device is in a state where the rotating door stands up. The gaming ball is restricted from entering the inside, and during the bonus game execution, the turning door turns to the front side of the gaming machine and receives the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the turning door, A gaming machine K3 configured to be guided to the inside of the variable winning device and to the sorting ball entrance.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, the variable winning device is provided with a rotatable door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In normal times, the upright turning door restricts the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning device. At the time of execution of the bonus game, the game ball received on the upper surface of the turn door is guided to the inside of the variable prize device and the sorting ball opening by turning the turn door to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, more game balls can be made to enter the distribution prize means during the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game even after the privilege game, and to allow the player to play the game for a longer time.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol that informs the lottery result is displayed on the display device. Has been proposed to be implemented in.
For example, in Patent Literature 1, by adjusting the interval between nails provided on a game board surface, the probability that a game ball wins a starting port provided on the game board surface is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2003-305209).
However, in such a gaming machine, since the process until the game ball enters the starting port is monotonous, there has been a problem that if the player plays a game for a long time, the player gets tired of the game.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine which can suppress a problem that a player gets tired of the game in the gaming machine as described above.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical concept 1 comprises a game entrance which is determined to be satisfied based on the entry of a game ball, and a game which is determined based on the establishment of the above described acceptance / rejection determination condition. And a bonus that enables a variable prize device to award a game ball to a variable prize device that grants a bonus to a player based on the hit / failure determination result of the hit / fail determination unit performing the hit / non-hit determination. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, the game machine having a distribution prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the distribution prize means includes a game ball in the distribution prize means. Alternately into a distributing ball entrance through which a ball can enter, and a first position for distributing a game ball entering the distributing entrance to a first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to a second flow path. First flow path switching means having movable first distribution moving means, and first flow path switching thereof A second position which alternately moves between a third position for distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the step to the third flow path and a fourth position for distributing the game balls to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance opening; A second flow path switching means having a distributing movable means, wherein the variable prize device is set to a position where a game ball can enter the distributing entrance opening when a game ball is entered. The prize-winning device and the sorting prize-winning means are respectively arranged.
The gaming machine according to the technical concept 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1, wherein the privilege game includes a special privilege game in which the variable prize means has a long open time and a variable prize means being opened more than the special privilege game. A bonus game type determining means for determining the type of the bonus game based on the fact that at least a short time normal bonus game is set, and the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the variable winning device has a rotating door rotatably supported on the front side of the gaming machine. Regulates that a game ball enters the variable prize device in a state where the turning door is upright, and at the time of executing a privilege game, the turning door turns to the front side of the gaming machine to turn. It is configured to receive a game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the door and guide the game ball to the inside of the variable winning device and to the distribution ball entrance.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is determined that the hit determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means being a hit, the bonus game execution means executes a privilege game in which a variable prize device for giving a privilege to a player can win a game ball.
In the sorting prize winning means for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, the game ball having entered the sorting ball inlet through which the game ball can enter the sorting prize means is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. A game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is switched to a third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The distribution is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means.
The variable prize device and the distribution prize means are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball opening when game balls are entered into the variable prize device.
As a result, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning means will enter the entrance opening. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the sorting winning award means, game balls enter the entrance opening. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the winning prize means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.
Also, during the award game, it is possible to enter the sorting entrance, so during the award game, by entering the sorting prize means, it is possible to enter the ball entry port after the award game. The required number of entering balls can be reduced, and a state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to make many game balls enter not only the variable prize apparatus but also the sorting prize means during the bonus game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the privilege game, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is long and a normal bonus game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is shorter than the special privilege game are set. Based on the result being a hit, the type of the bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means.
As a result, when the special privilege game is determined, not only the opening time of the variable prize device is extended but also an opportunity to allow more game balls to enter the distribution prize means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with more benefits for the types of privilege games.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable winning device is provided with a rotatable door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In normal times, the upright turning door restricts the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning device. At the time of execution of the bonus game, the game ball received on the upper surface of the turn door is guided to the inside of the variable prize device and the sorting ball opening by turning the turn door to the front side of the gaming machine.
As a result, more game balls can be made to enter the distribution prize means during the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game even after the bonus game, and to have the effect that the player can play the game for a longer time.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 Distribution winning device ( switching means )
65 variable winning devices (variable input sphere means)
71 1st starting port (ball entrance )

Claims (3)

A ball entrance that is determined to satisfy the acceptance / rejection determination condition based on a game ball entering,
A winning / failing determining means for performing a winning / failing determination of a game based on the satisfaction of the winning / falling determination condition;
A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that enables a variable prize device that gives a player a bonus game ball to win a game ball based on the hit / failure determination result of the hit / fail determination unit being a hit. Gaming machines that have
Having a sorting prize means for guiding a game ball to the entrance,
The sorting winning means,
A sorting entrance that allows game balls to enter the sorting winning means,
A first distributing means having a first distributing movable means which is alternately movable to a first position for distributing a game ball having entered the distributing entrance to the first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to the second flow path; Flow path switching means,
A first position for distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to a third flow path and a fourth position for distributing the game balls to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. And a second flow path switching means having a second distribution moving means that moves alternately,
The variable prize device and the distribution prize unit are respectively arranged at positions where game balls can enter the distribution ball entrance when a game ball is entered into the variable prize device. A gaming machine characterized by that: In the privilege game, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is long and a normal privilege game in which the opening time of the variable prize means is shorter than the special privilege game are set.
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a bonus game type determining unit that determines the type of the bonus game based on a result of the determination by the determination unit.   The variable winning device has a rotating door rotatably supported on the front side of the gaming machine. Normally, a game ball enters the variable winning device with the rotating door standing upright. When the bonus game is executed, the turning door turns to the front side of the gaming machine to receive a game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the turning door, and the inside of the variable winning device and The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be guided to a sorting entrance.

Images